JP6562069B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the game setting value may be suggested to the player by a predetermined effect.

JP 2000-024234 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in games and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
A performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
A performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
Visual state control means for controlling the visual restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and enabling visual recognition of at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). 51),
It is characterized by providing.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of a main controller. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. The figure which shows the example of a display in the performance display monitor of a performance information display apparatus. The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variable game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between an operation detection pattern and an operation condition. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 31. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 31. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the game setting value suggestion character classification which suggests a game setting value. The figure which shows an example of the game setting value suggestion character selection table used by the appearance performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the character mode selection table used by the appearance performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the character mode selection table used by the appearance performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the appearance performance suggestion image displayed on a sub image display part in a variable game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening basic effect selection table used by the opening effect determination process performed by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the rank suggestion image classification which suggests the rank of the number of lottery per unit big hit. The figure which shows an example of the unit big hit lottery number suggestion image selection table used by opening effect determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the opening screen in jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the ending basic effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process performed by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40, and a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table. The figure which shows an example of the ending screen in jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used by the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process performed by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used by the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. The figure which shows an example of the round game character selection table and unit lottery lottery number suggestion image selection table which are used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the round game screen of the opening / closing execution mode in jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows the other example of the appearance performance suggestion image in a variable game. The figure which shows the other example of the appearance performance suggestion image in a variable game. The figure which shows the other example of the round game screen of the opening / closing execution mode in jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a command determination process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of jackpot game effect processing. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process performed by the jackpot game effect process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process performed by the jackpot game effect process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process in the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the point table used by a ball appearance performance suggestion image display process, and a total point rank corresponding | compatible table. The figure which shows an example of the total point suggestion character selection table referred with the appearance performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process in the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 64A shows an example of an expected value rank correspondence table, and FIG. 64B shows an example of an expected value rank suggested character selection table used in the appearance performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing an example of a clown device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65. 68A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 69A is a front view showing the staying box and its periphery when the staying box is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69B is a longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 69A, and FIG. 69C is FIG. Sectional drawing which follows the X3-X3 cutting line of A). FIG. 70A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69B showing the stay box and its periphery when the stay box is at the lower limit position, and FIG. 70B is a stay box when the stay box is at the lower limit position. FIG. 70C is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C showing the periphery thereof and FIG. 70C is a cross-sectional view of the stay box when the stay box is at the intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. FIG. 70D is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C showing the staying box and its periphery when the staying box is in the intermediate position. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65. 72A is a front view showing an example of the special main display unit, and FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a display example of the special main display unit. The figure which shows typically the visual recognition state of the special main display part in the lower movement levels 0-2. 74 (A) and 74 (A) are diagrams schematically showing the state of visual recognition of the special main display section at the lower movement levels 3 and 4, and FIG. 74 (C) is the number of staying game balls in the stay box and the stay box. The figure which shows the relationship with a downward movement level. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a stay box down movement process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the clown apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and its periphery. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X4-X4 in FIG. 79; 81A is a perspective view illustrating an example of the special main display unit and the translucent monitor, and FIG. 81B illustrates an example of the relationship between the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor and the visual state of the special main display unit. FIG. 81 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out-ball count number and the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an exemplary procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 82. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of visual control processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a light shielding control process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 82. The figure which shows the other example of the relationship between a visual recognition level and the visual recognition state of a special main display part. 87A is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the plurality of areas and the visual recognition state of the special main display unit, and FIG. 87B is another example of the relationship between the visual recognition level and the visual recognition state of the special main display unit. FIG. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 89 is a sectional view taken along the line X5-X5 in FIG. 88; FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 when the forced discharge member is in the operating position. Sectional drawing of the area | region containing the staying box and special main display part in a gaming machine. 92 (A) and 92 (B) are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the downward movement level of the staying box and the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor and the lower limit position detection sensor, and FIG. 92 (C) is a translucent monitor. The figure which shows the visual recognition control state of the special main display part by. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the staying box operation | movement check process performed with an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of error processing executed in the staying box operation check processing of FIG. 94. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a stay box down movement process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an electrical decoration unit 27.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). This operation button 20 is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by a player in a predetermined specific period in a variable game effect executed in a variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery to the player. It is operated to execute an operation button effect.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11 and execute a sound output effect that outputs sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs lamp production | presentation by the blinking aspects, such as lighting color and lighting or light extinction.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. A variable display unit 34 and a main display unit 37 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, game balls can be detected individually corresponding to the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 to be described later. This is detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5). The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits the right.

  The entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are sent to the main control unit 331. Entered. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball by the ball sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launch mechanism 32. Note that the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but are arbitrary sensors that can individually detect the incoming ball of the game ball by other detection methods. May be.

  In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315 b, and the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by closing the electric accessory 315 b. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable prize opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the variable prize opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening / closing door 316b is opened, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable prize opening 316, and when the opening / closing door 316b is closed, the game ball is restricted from entering the variable prize opening 316. The

  In the gaming machine 10, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control unit 331 when the entrance of a game ball into the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 is detected by the incoming sensor 314 a or the incoming sensor 315 a. And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entering the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball sensors 313 a to 316 a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and 16R probability jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, five round games (unit games) in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) or more game balls are won in the variable prize opening 316. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state including an open / close execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than the 5R jackpot gaming state, and more than the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed at a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol change display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 entered. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs, such as another character or a design, may be displayed between main symbols. In this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine main symbol types “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”, the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an active line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Is done. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the active line, but is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, for example, “777” symbol combination arranged in an active line Is displayed, or a combination of the same symbols other than “777” is displayed on the active line. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, a state in which symbol combinations such as “333”, which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot in the main symbol, are arranged in an active line is displayed. Alternatively, a state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” and “333” are arranged on the active line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than a combination of symbols indicating a probable jackpot such as “222” or “444”, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged on an active line is displayed. When the lottery result is “out”, a state in which different combinations of main symbols are arranged on an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable game effect indicating a degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big hit, along with the change display of the main symbol in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, if a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R probability variation jackpot is given as a variable game effect. Or the suggestion effect which suggests that it is 5R normal jackpot is performed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, when a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R normal jackpot is given as a variable game effect. The suggestion effect that suggests that is. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

  Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state.

  A sub-image display unit 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In the sub-image display unit 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game or a jackpot game. In addition, the sub-image display unit 38 executes an effect that suggests to the player information (performance information) related to the performance of playing in a variable game or a jackpot game. Although details of the performance information will be described later, this performance information includes, for example, a game set value, lottery count information for unit big hits, base information, continuous character ratio information, and character ratio information. The sub image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  It is also conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 is performed illegally using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraud. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a and erroneously detecting the incoming ball of the game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. Note that the radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 disposed in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays a lottery result as to whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern) with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger. In the 7-segment display 372, a symbol change display is performed using a winning at the first winning port 314 as a trigger, and a symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, the symbol variation display is performed with the winning of the second winning opening 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the variable display holding number N and holding number M generated by winning the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. In addition, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the incoming sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 have entered based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. Judging. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 sends a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game set value to the voice lamp control device 5. Commands such as a change command and a lottery lottery update command are output.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when the symbol variation display by the main display unit 37 is started. The The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result, a variation pattern in a jackpot lottery for the increased hold, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (see FIG. 15 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 when the reserved number N or the reserved number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. This is set in the game state transition process in the main process. Since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, the sound lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command and starts the jackpot game. In addition to this, it can be grasped that the opening is started. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may be made aware of the opening being started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. This is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to grasp that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started, but separately from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, the opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of round games to be started at the time of starting the round game may be set, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG.

  The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value. Step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Set in

  The lottery lottery number update command for the unit big hit is given to the first winning opening 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls (for example, per minus 250 balls) in a normal gaming state (a state that is a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times that the symbol variation display on the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed (the number of times that the jackpot lottery has been received) in response to winning a prize. It is updated in step S1805 in the performance information update process.

  It should be noted that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation which will be described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big win lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electronic role hold area 412c in the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric winning combination 315b of the second winning prize opening 315 is set to the electric winning open state, and initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set. And a normal initial value counter CIN2 to be used. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value by the MPU 41 at short time intervals and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 during the big win lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the seven-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually provided for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 includes the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

  Therefore, the big hit lottery for the variable game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB In addition to the lottery result, the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be determined in advance.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number in which the success / failure information is stored among the first to-hold areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number-of-holds N.

  When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reserved number storage area NAB, the number in which the success / failure information is stored among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is stored as the reserved number M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning slot 314 is provided by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of success / failure information as winning history to the second winning opening 315.

  In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common with the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be combined. It is possible to hold the success / failure information as the winning history. The storing process of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the validity information stored in the. Specifically, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and there is no success / failure information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  It should be noted that the difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. In another embodiment, the success / failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The success / failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is shifted to the first reserved area REB1, and the third reserved The success / failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

  Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation gaming state, according to the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7 (A) and FIG. 7 (B), as the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (the jackpot probability) is the game set value. A plurality of different success / failure tables are provided accordingly. The low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table include four success / failure tables corresponding to the four game setting values 1 to 4, respectively. In the order of the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 824 (0 to 823) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 5 (824/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, among 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery results is 213 (0 to 212) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 852 (0 to 851) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 307.7 (213/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 9 (852/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, among 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 220 (0 to 219) for the low probability mode success / failure table. The probability mode success / failure table is 880 (0 to 879). That is, in the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 297.9 (220/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 4 times that of the low probability mode. 5 (880/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery results is 227 (0 to 226) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 908 (0 to 907) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 288.7 (227/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 2 (908/65536).

  Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

  Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, the same lottery results in the jackpot lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that are jackpots are not common It is done. Further, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

  Further, four low probability mode success / failure tables and four high probability mode success / failure tables are provided in accordance with the four-stage game settings. However, at least one success / failure table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting is not limited to four stages. It is also conceivable to provide one low probability mode success / failure table while providing a plurality of low probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game settings. That is, it is conceivable that a multi-stage setting is provided for the low-probability mode and a step-by-step game setting is not provided for the high-probability mode, and the jackpot probability is uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be uniform, and a plurality of game settings may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411.

  Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning port 314, the number of random numbers that become 5R probability variable jackpots is 0 to 10 The number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second prize opening 315, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is five, 0-4, and 16R probability variation jackpots. The number of random numbers is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R big hits is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability variation big hit in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation big hit in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. In other words, the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) is a big hit compared to the short time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit, the expected value of game balls to be acquired is set high.

  In the present embodiment, individual swings are provided for each of the first winning port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and each second winning port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. There is a minute table, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability changing machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, a kind-two-mixer, or the like.

  Based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, “5R normal hit” It is determined whether it is “big hit” or “off”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, a transition is made to a probability variation gaming state that is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the game shifts to the short-time gaming state in the low-probability mode with a low probability of winning the jackpot and the high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) informs the player of the lottery result in a jackpot lottery of a preset number of times set in advance, such as 50 times and 100 times. Or when the player determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, a jackpot of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times) set in advance after the jackpot game at the time of probability changing jackpot. When the lottery is executed in the probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the big lottery does not become a big hit by the specified number of times, the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency) Support mode) and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from a probability variation game state to a short-time game state or a normal game state in a variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state or the short-time gaming state. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the variable display stop result displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, the reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and the complete detachment where no reach occurs.

  Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram illustrating an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7D, the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value other than the front / rear reach is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out of the range is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game that wins a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, that is, a variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, “reach” indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to be between the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a game in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation level, or a player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person-participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, and the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented, for example, one by one within a range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination reservation area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 412c. For example, it is conceivable that the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that the winning combination is lost when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the sound lamp control device 5 allows the rough variation game effect such as high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect, super reach effect, and special reach effect. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, or a deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided individually for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 8A, FIG. 8B, and FIG. 8C are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table. As shown in FIG. 8A, FIG. 8B, and FIG. 8C, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery When the result is “out”, the type of variation pattern is specified by referring to the out variation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the normal reach production pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 performs the super reach production. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest change display time of 90 s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the special reach. A production pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 for each stop type at the time of deviation (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear out, complete out) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. Correspondence relations with fluctuation patterns are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of departure is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth, any of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the part 341 (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a change display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In unit 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of departure corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the variation pattern in which the variation display deviates without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed is stopped. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the fluctuation display of the deviation pattern which stops with the symbol is displayed with a notice effect such as a character, a message or the like being displayed. Executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8A, 8B, and 8C. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects to be executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”. The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach production with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach production executed in the super reach production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”. One of the super-reach productions is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer variation time than normal reach production, the probability of winning a lottery in the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal reach production (expected degree), and wins more than the special reach production It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (expectation) is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects to be executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”. One of the special reach productions performed is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, for example, an effect that develops from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is suggested to have a higher probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot than the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  Note that in the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which the single operation is reflected in the effect, or the operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which a continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  When the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed. Input to the sound lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” with a change pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “B03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “C03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 adds fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the fluctuation patterns are “01” to “05” before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. One of the following is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces sound from the speaker 26 according to the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process for determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. Moreover, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information related to game history, play performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes, as game information, “number of out balls”, “number of payout balls for general winning mouth”, “number of payout balls for first winning mouth”, and “number of payout balls for second winning mouth”. ”,“ Variable prize slot payout ball ”,“ Game setting value ”,“ Base information ”,“ Continuous feature ratio information ”,“ Property ratio information ”,“ Cumulative jackpot lottery count ”,“ Unit jackpot lottery count ”,“ Big hit count ”, and“ Consecutive loss count ”are stored. Among these pieces of game information, “game setting value”, “base information”, “continuous feature ratio information”, “actual component ratio information”, and “unit big hit lottery number of times” are game information (performance) Information).

  The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in a normal game state (a state with a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). This “number of out balls” is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interruption process of FIG.

  The “general winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the general winning opening 313 in a normal gaming state (a state of low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). This “general winning opening payout ball number” is the setting of the winning ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning slot 313 in the normal gaming state. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of paying balls due to the current winning. .

  The “number of first winning mouth payout balls” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the first winning mouth 314 in a normal gaming state (a state that is in a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). . This “first winning opening payout ball number” is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning to the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out at the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the first winning port 314 in the command setting process Update to

  The “number of payout balls for the second winning opening” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the second winning opening 315 in the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). . This “second winning mouth payout ball number” is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 315a detects a winning in the second winning mouth 315 in the short-time gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out in this winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process Update to

  The “variable winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This “variable winning award payout ball number” is the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 316a detects a winning in the variable winning award 316 in the big hit gaming state. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the value is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning. .

  Note that the “out-of-balls”, “general winning-out / out-of-balls”, “first winning-out / out-of-balls”, “second winning-out / out-of-balls” and “variable winning-out / out-of-balls” In the specific performance information update process of No. 21, when “the number of out balls” reaches 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 balls (step S1810).

  The “game setting value” is used to select a low-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and a high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment). . In other words, the “game setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, four-stage game setting (four types of low-probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 7A) and high-probability mode success / failure tables with different jackpot probabilities) (see FIG. 7B)) Has been prepared. The “game setting value” is updated in a game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later.

  The “base information” is information related to “base” which is a payout rate (a payout rate) in a normal gaming state (a state that is in a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode), and this “base” is a normal gaming state Is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the “number of payout balls for the general winning opening” and the “number of payout balls for the first winning mouth” with respect to the “number of out balls” in FIG. When “base” is expressed by a mathematical formula, “base” = 100 × (“number of payout balls for general winning mouth” + “number of payout balls for first winning mouth”) / “number of out balls”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the last 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is Each time as the 60,000 coin base B2, the game information storage area of the RAM 412 is stored as “base information”. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes “current base BL”, “previous 60,000 base B1” and “previous 60,000 base B2”, and the past 60,000 bases are recorded in history. However, you may make it leave the past 60,000 bases more than three times as a history. Further, the “base information” may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

  “Consecutive character ratio information” indicates the total number of balls to be paid out by winning a prize to all winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315, and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. The information regarding the “continuous character ratio”, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payouts for the variable winning opening. When the “continuous character ratio” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “continuous character ratio” = 100 × “variable winning award payout ball number” / “total payout ball number”. “Continuous character ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update processing of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the “continuous character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative continuous character ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. “Consecutive character ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the ratio of the continuous feature with respect to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls) may be used. Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a certain number of periods.

  “Composition ratio information” is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information relating to an “object ratio” which is a ratio occupied by the total number of payout balls in the second prize port payout balls and the variable prize port payout balls. Expressing the “role ratio” as a mathematical expression, it is “ratio of bonuses” = 100 × (“number of payouts for second winning mouth” + “number of payouts for variable winning mouth”) / “total number of payouts”. The “object ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. In the present embodiment, the “combination item ratio information” is stored as the accumulated combination rate from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the “rights ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) in the normal gaming state, It may be a ratio of an accessory to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative character ratio and the character ratio over a certain period.

  The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” refers to the normal gaming state (the state that is in the low probability mode but not the high frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present time before the game hall starts business. It is the number of times that the jackpot lottery was performed. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is also the cumulative variation display count in which the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed in response to winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. Further, the “cumulative lottery number of lotteries” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  “Number of lottery per unit jackpot” refers to a lottery lottery triggered by winning a prize to the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in a normal gaming state (in a low probability mode but not in a high frequency support mode). This is the number of times received (the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the “general winning port payout ball number” and the “first winning port payout ball number” from the “out ball number”. In other words, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is the number of symbol variations displayed on the 7-segment indicator 372 (the number of jackpot lottery wins) averaged at 1000 yen when receiving 250 balls for 1000 yen in a game hall. is there. The “unit jackpot number of lotteries” may be the number of times that a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit big hit number of lotteries” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpot numbers (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state, The number of out balls may be for a certain number (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “unit big hit lottery number”, both the cumulative unit big hit lottery number and the unit big hit lottery number in a certain period may be stored as game information.

  “Number of jackpots” is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present before the game hall starts operating is a jackpot. The “hit number” is incremented by one each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. Further, the “number of jackpots” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  “Number of consecutive misses” is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are continuously missed in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode but not the high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a jackpot If cleared to 0 times. The “number of consecutive misses” is the result of the go / no-go determination based on the low probability mode go / no-go table in step S1603 when the symbol change display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the change start process of FIG. If it is off, 1 is added, and if the result of the determination is a big hit, it is cleared to 0. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive failures” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “game setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” in the gaming machine 10 and is provided at a position where the inner frame 12 is visible (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

  The 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment display 431-434, when displaying the alphabet “B”, the dot is lit to display “8.” to distinguish it from the number “8”, and the alphabet “D” is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number “0”, the dot is lit and displayed as “0.”. In addition, when displaying any of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to light a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display “base type” as an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segment displays The display units 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbols “BL” of the current base BL are “8.”, “L” in the left two 7-segment indicators 431 and 432 that are identification segments. The base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” in the right two 7-segment indicators 433 and 434 that are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434, “8.”, “L”, “3”, and “1” are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434) at the same time by a pressing operation. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power supply is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When an operation to turn on the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation to turn off the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the energization to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main controller 4.

  Here, FIG. 11 is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the base information is not displayed because the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 are in the off state. As shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is used as “base information” unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The base is looped in order of the ball base B1 → the previous 60,000 ball base B2 → the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 11C, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% before the last time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B 1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B 2, and the performance display monitor 43 A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. In addition, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of “base information” or in addition to “base information”, it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as “continuous character ratio information” and “character ratio information”. Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the game set value display unit 45 selects a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7 (A)) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7 (B)) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. In order to display the above-mentioned game setting value, it is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the game set value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and uses the performance display monitor 43. The game setting value may be displayed.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches on / off the power of the 7-segment display by a pressing operation, and allows the game set value to be changed by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation and a function as a rotary switch that switches a contact by a rotation operation (rotation at a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the game set value display unit 45 is in the extinguished state, the game set value is obtained by energizing the 7-segment display. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is “1”. On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lit state, the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off by turning off the power to the 7-segment display. It becomes a state.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (B), when the game setting value display unit 45 is in a lighting state, when a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed. Is done. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the game setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the game setting value display unit is displayed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45 to the left. The number displayed in the part 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as a game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 and the power of the 7-segment display is turned off, The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects a low-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 7A) or a high-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 7B) selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A lottery lottery can be performed based on (see)).

  The method for changing the game set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value change operation unit 46. For example, by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the game setting value is determined, or by pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) repeatedly. A method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, by inserting a key into a key hole provided in the main controller 4 or the like and rotating the key A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 may be used.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341. The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a sound used for a variable game effect, a jackpot game effect, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 when executing a later-described variable game effect and jackpot game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26 and an electrical decoration unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, an image game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341, and a sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

  Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 changes a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination (see FIG. 32A)), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 32) based on the variation pattern command. (See (B))) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C)), and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (FIG. 31). In step S23057 in the command determination process, the symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball performance suggestion image display process for displaying a ball performance suggestion image that suggests the ball performance on the sub-image display unit 38.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as a variation symbol such as a main symbol used in symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a loss effect image. ing. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of the change symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount of money that is lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32 increases as the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, etc., a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after the startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, description of the startup process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 13, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball to any of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412. In addition, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. To do. Note that the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d reaches 60,000 balls, and is cleared to 0 balls when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum values. In this case, the counter value is cleared to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the launch of. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery to determine whether or not the electric combination 315b of the second winning opening 315 is to be set in the electric combination open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. If the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is judged that. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal symbol is won, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is judged that. When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the MPU 315b opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged in parallel.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S <b> 1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning for the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106 if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 13, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 16). And the counter value of S1313) is acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the contents of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is determined as a jackpot success / failure determination target in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19). Confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning for the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and when it is determined that there is no winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S <b> 1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 13, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 16). And the counter value with S1313) is stored, and the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REB1 to REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the success / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is subject to determination of the success / failure process (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19) described later. The content is confirmed, and a second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 15, “first hold command” is read as “second hold command” and “hold number N” is read as “hold number M”. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process shown in FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or miss), a variation pattern, and the number N of hold. . Hereinafter, the first pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step S1). S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON when shifting to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 16) in the main processing described later, whether or not it is in the high probability mode. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag that is set to OFF at the time of transition to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 7B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the success / failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 7A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success / failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed.

  In steps S1203 and S1204, determination of success / failure is performed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or a low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the success / failure information is stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 14, the jackpot type counter C2 included in the success / failure information stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 and The counter value of the variation type counter CS1 is read. Of the first reserved storage area RE1 to the fourth reserved storage area RE4, the reserved area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 14 is the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA. Can be determined by the value of.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hold number N to the first hold command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize in which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the success / failure information stored in the first hold command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of date, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  Note that the first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other is performed in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 16 described later that is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. After being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with this command, it is deleted. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1310 are executed as a periodic process with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S1311 to S1313 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1310 to the next period. The

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output process to be sent to. For example, in the RAM 412, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game setting value change command, a unit jackpot lottery number update command, etc. If set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information in the RAM 412 in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode but not in the high frequency support mode) when a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314. The number of payout balls for the general winning opening or the number of payout balls for the first winning opening stored in the area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current winning prize. In addition, the MPU 41 receives the second prize opening 315 in the short-time gaming state (the state that is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode) or the probability variation gaming state (the state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode). When a winning has occurred, the number of the second winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 uses the variable winning opening payout ball number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in the case of winning in the variable winning opening 316 as the number of payout balls due to this winning. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17. In the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Is done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of lottery lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game including the opening, the opening / closing execution mode and the ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 316b for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (the jackpot type) ) Run as many times as you like. For example, when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 executes the round game five times, and when the jackpot type is 16R probability jackpot, the round game is executed 16 times. In the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the probability variation gaming state in which the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are in effect, the low probability mode and the high probability mode. A transition is made to a short-time gaming state in the frequency support mode, a normal gaming state not in the high-frequency support mode in the low probability mode, or the like.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot In some cases, after the jackpot game is over, a transition to the short-time game state is made. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is completed in the short-time gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state after the end of the variable game.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, when the game state transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to off while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from the probability variation gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

  Further, when the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot gaming start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the “number of jackpots” stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. Stop display will be displayed. In addition, by the display control process, each LED lamp blinks for a predetermined normal symbol variation display time in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, and the pair of LED lamps are turned on and off depending on whether or not the normal symbol is won. This is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of the above. In the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second winning opening 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process for controlling the display or non-display of the game setting value or the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation on the setting value changing operation unit 46 is executed. The Details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process. However, during the start-up process that is activated when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process, the launch of the game ball is started. It is also conceivable that the execution is limited. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the game setting value can be changed within the business hall operating hours. Can be prevented.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of lottery per unit lottery, the continuous bonus rate, and the bonus rate are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process for displaying the base information updated in step S1309 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main process execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the next main process execution timing has arrived (step S1311: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and the above-described processes after S1301 are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1311: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. Until the execution time of the next main process is determined during the remaining remaining time (step S1311: Yes), step S1311, step S1312, and step S1313 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1311.

[Variable game control processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is performed. When the game is over and the game is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The presence or absence of execution of the jackpot game is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to Step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 19 described later, and the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). This determination is made based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If the MPU 41 determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes). On the other hand, when either one of the hold number N and the hold number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b. If the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a change display based on the validity information, and ends the change game control process. Details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number M of holds is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success / failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success / failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the fourth reservation area REA4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is shifted when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is shifted when both or one of the holding number M and the holding number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 because it can be determined that the hold number N is not 0 when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No).

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the validity information of the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the fourth reserved area REB4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and proceeds to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to ON in the gaming state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16 is set to ON. . When the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 holds the reserved storage area based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 7B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 holds based on the low probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 7A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined.

  Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, determination of success / failure is performed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the determination result in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8A). Identify. Further, when the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8B). . Further, if the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is out of place, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the out-of-range variation table (see FIG. 8C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “ordinary big hit”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating “5R normal big hit” to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the MPU 41 adds any one of “B01” to “B03” to which “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is 5R probability variation big hit is added. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” added to the variation patterns “01” to “03” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the variation patterns “01” to “08”. A command is set in the RAM 412. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out is included in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 sets the variation display flag to ON. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game process of FIG. 17 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is being performed. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the determination of success / failure based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 is out of order, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive failures” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the success / failure result is a big hit. In some cases, the “number of consecutive failures” is cleared to zero.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the game setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value change process is terminated. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is set (step S1702). If the jackpot gaming state is set (step S1702: Yes), the game setting is made. When the value change process is finished and the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display nor the big hit gaming state is present (both No in steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703). It is determined whether or not an operation to turn on the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot gaming state is in effect (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. Absent. Here, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is turned on from off. If not switched to (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1703: YES), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1703). In step S1704, a number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). Thereby, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on a setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1706), and ends the game setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. When the setting value display flag is set on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and when the setting value display flag is set off (step S1707: No). That is, when the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power is not turned on, the game setting value changing process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game setting value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1709, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No). The processing moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle. Conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number that is one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

  If the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “4”, and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the game set value display unit 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to “1” and the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “1”, the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle. In this case, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to “4”. In addition, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is “4”, the game setting value display unit 45 is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is “1”. In some cases, it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as a game setting value, and ends the game setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the RAM 412 as an effective game setting value. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value. It is determined whether or not an operation for turning off the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the change operation unit 46. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game setting value changing process is terminated. In addition, when the power supply of the game setting value display part 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1711: Yes), in the game setting value display part 45, the energization to the 7-segment display is cut off, thereby the game setting value. The number indicating is turned off, and the game setting value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 is in the low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. The success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, since the success / failure table of the same game setting value is selected in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the game setting value changing operation is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the game setting value in the low probability mode is set to “1” and the game setting value in the high probability mode is set to “4”. It becomes possible to make it a set value.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads out the number of various payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Reading is performed (step S1802). Here, the number of payout balls is the number of payout balls necessary for updating the base information and the like. The number of payout balls for the general winning opening, the number of payout balls for the first winning mouth, the number of payout balls for the second winning mouth, and the variable payout opening ball Number is applicable. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read number of general winning award payout balls, the number of first payout payout balls, and the number of out balls, and the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is calculated. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 22A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (number of payouts for general winning mouth + number of payouts for first winning mouth) / out number of balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the cumulative jackpot lottery count (cumulative variation display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The number of lottery per unit jackpot is calculated as the number of symbol variations displayed on the 7-segment display 372 (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) until the number of minus difference balls in the normal gaming state is 250. Specifically, the number of lottery per unit jackpot = “cumulative jackpot lottery count” / ((“number of out balls” − “number of balls paid out for general winning mouth” − “number of balls paid out for first winning mouth”) / 250 balls) Is done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is calculated as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out in step S1802 has reached 60000 balls. If the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807. When the number of out balls has not reached 60000 balls (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process is terminated.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base last time in the base information (step S1807), and step S1803. The current base BL updated in step S1 is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears various payout balls and out balls in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls (step S1810), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIG. 23 to FIG. 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1310 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1908 in FIG. 24, and when the BL display flag is set off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 has been displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 24 described later. When the B1 display flag is set on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1918 in FIG. 25, and when the B1 display flag is set off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 has been displayed twice before the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. When the B2 display flag is set on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 in FIG. 26, and when the B2 display flag is set off (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No), The display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: YES), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S1907), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. In step S1908, it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.”, “1” indicating that the previous 60,000 base B1 is 33%. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 3 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2” and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S1913), and The display control process ends.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the current base BL by turning off the power to the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: YES), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1914). S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. In step S1917, it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The 60,000-ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), “8.”, “2” indicating that the 60,000 base B2 is 32% the previous time. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 2 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the previous time (step S1922). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000 ball base B1. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1924). In step S1925, the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: YES), as shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current state base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434 before the 60,000 ball base B2 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). S1934), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Explanation of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the MPU 51 performs an operation detection process (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), a counter update process (step S2003), and a command determination process (step S2004) in the sub timer interrupt process. Then, the variable game effect process (step S2005) and the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection process (step S2001) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, an operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, whether or not the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process by performing the operation detection process by the MPU 51. Will be judged.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. In step S2102, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2103, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation detection process, the processes of steps S2101 to S2103 are executed, so that the operation status of the last three operations at the 1 msec interval as the operation history of the operation button 20 is changed from the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining an operation state for the operation button 20 from an operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2202, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2205.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2203, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2208.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2204, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S2203: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued when the operation state of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. Then, the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S2205>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2201 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2205). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2206, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S2205: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2207, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2206: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “off”, “on”, and “on” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Therefore, the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2208>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2202 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S2208). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2210, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2208: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2209.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “on”, “off”, and “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Therefore, the third operation pattern flag is set on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set off (see FIG. 30). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation end of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “off”, “off”, “off”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 30). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the counter update process (step S2003), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the main symbol to be stopped first based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. The MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type that suggests the game setting value. For example, the character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 114. The MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the character mode type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character mode type counter updated here is used to determine the character mode type that suggests the number of lottery per unit jackpot. For example, the character mode type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-119. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the opening basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Also, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the opening rank suggestion image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery executed together with the basic effect at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 104. The MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The updated ending basic effect type counter is used to determine the basic effect type in the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the ending rank suggestion image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery executed together with the basic effect in the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 74. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-79. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the round game character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type in the round game of the jackpot game. For example, the round game character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-49. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the round game rank suggestion image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery executed together with the round game effect of the jackpot game. For example, the round game rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 89.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2004), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, if the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2302. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2301: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2301, and is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is subject to processing, for example, in the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 32A), a variation type table (see FIG. 32B), and an effect type table (previously stored in the ROM 511). The variation pattern is determined based on the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 and the value shown in FIGS. In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type Is 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production pattern table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 33A), a super reach production pattern table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 33B), and a special reach production corresponding to special reach. A pattern table (see FIG. 33C) is included.

  FIG. 32A shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 32A, in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is determined. In FIG. 32A, the main symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), “777”. ”Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and a symbol combination other than“ 333 ”and“ 777 ”is a symbol combination indicating that any of the 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “3” and “7” It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” or “777” indicating 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, there is no distribution of “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the symbol combination “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation big hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combinations whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal jackpots can be stopped and displayed. If the main symbol other than “3” except “7” is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the MPU 51 indicates that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot in the jackpot game. The 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified is executed.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16-probable big hit”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, symbol combinations other than “777” that indicate 16R probability variation big hit can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “777” symbol combination indicating that the main symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

  Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol determined previously. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 in the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. Is done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 51 selects the outage type selected based on the outage type table (FIG. 7D) and the first stop determined earlier. A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the detachment type is front / rear detachment reach, the second stop symbol is determined as the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined as the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than front / rear detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is determined by the design. When the detachment type is complete detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example of the variation type table. As shown in FIG. 32B, in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, a variation display command “A01” having a lottery result “normal jackpot” and a variation pattern “01” is associated with a variation display time “30 s” and a variation type “normal reach effect pattern”. Also, the variation display command “B02” having the lottery result “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern “02” is associated with the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern”. The variation display command “C03” whose lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and variation pattern is “03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern”. Further, the variation display command “D04” with the lottery result “out” and the variation pattern “04” is associated with the variation display time “7 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. The variation display command “D05” with the result “out” and the variation pattern “05” is associated with the variation display time “10 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”.

  Further, FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 33A is a normal reach effect pattern type table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 33B is the final individual in the variable game effect. FIG. 33C is a super reach production pattern table that is referred to when the production type is the super reach production, and FIG. 33C is a special reach production that is referred to when the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production. It is a pattern table.

  In this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example. However, the number of types of effects may be six or more. In FIG. 33, the effect type table when the variation type is “no reach” is omitted.

  In the normal reach production pattern type table shown in FIG. 33A, the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and off). “Production pattern X1” to “Production pattern X5” are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects an effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. To do. Here, the production pattern X1 to the production pattern X3 included in the normal reach production pattern type table are productions in which a normal reach production in which the main symbol is in a reach state after the high-speed variation production in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed is executed, for example. The final individual effect type is an effect that becomes a normal reach effect.

  Also, in the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33B, “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Yes. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern Y1 to the production pattern Y3 included in the super reach production pattern table, for example, the normal reach production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and the expectation degree is higher than the normal reach production as the final individual production type. This is a production that develops into a super reach production that has a longer production execution time than a normal reach production. Note that the super reach production pattern table may include a super reach production pattern production that develops into a super reach production after the high-speed fluctuation production is completed without going through the normal reach production.

  Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Yes. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is determined from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the normal reach effect and the super reach effect as the final individual effect types. This is an effect that develops into a special reach production that has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach production and has a longer execution execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the special reach production pattern table may include special reach production patterns that develop into special reach production after the end of high-speed fluctuation production or normal reach production without passing through at least one of normal reach production and super reach production. Good.

  Then, the MPU 51 stores in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table, and a stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2304>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S <b> 2304, the MPU 51 executes a ball appearance performance suggestion image display process for causing the sub image display unit 38 to display a ball appearance performance suggestion image that suggests the ball appearance performance. In the appearance performance suggestion image display processing, the sub image display section 38 displays the appearance performance suggestion image in a mode in which a character selected according to the game setting value is selected according to the number of unit big hits when a specific condition is satisfied. To display. The details of the appearance performance suggestion process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2305>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process (step S2003) of FIG. 27, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed based on the variation display counter, the remaining time of the variation display time, and the like. Can be determined. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the content of the output performance suggestion image in the symbol display unit 341. Then, the command determination process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined in step S2303, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the appearance performance suggestion image. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores main symbol variation images and effect images corresponding to the display variation pattern commands. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses. The main symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed in order. During the main symbol variation display, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. . On the other hand, in the sub-image display unit 38, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

<Step S2307>
In step S2307, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2307: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2308, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2307: No), the process Goes to step S2310.

<Step S2308>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2308). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2309>
In step S2309, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting a jackpot game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later. (Step S2601).

<Step S2310>
In step S2310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command for starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and indicating the number of rounds of the round game, and the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Set in Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2310: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2311, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2310: No), the process The process proceeds to step S2313.

<Steps S2311 and S2312>
In step S2311, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2604). Then, the MPU 51 stores the number of rounds of the started round game in the RAM 512 as the number of rounds information based on the number of rounds information indicating the number of round games included in the round game start command (step). S2312).

<Step S2313>
In step S2313, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that ending in the jackpot game is started, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2313: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2314, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2312: No), the process proceeds to step S2314. The process moves to S2315.
<Step S2314>
In step S2314, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2609).

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2315: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2316, and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2315: No), processing is performed. Goes to step S2317.

<Step S2316>
In step S2316, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect). In the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later, it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect. (Step S2612).

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Is done. Here, if the received command is a game setting value change command (step S2317: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2318, and if the received command is not a game setting value change command (step S2317: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores it. Note that the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2404 in the game performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 34 described later, and is referred to in order to select a character type that suggests the game setting value.

<Step S2319>
In step S2319, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a unit big hit lottery count update command. The lottery lottery number update command for the unit big hit is given to the first winning opening 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls (for example, per minus 250 balls) in a normal gaming state (a state that is a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). 21 is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times that the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed (the number of times that the jackpot lottery has been received) in response to the winning, and the specific performance information of FIG. It is updated in step S1805 in the update process. Here, when the received command is a unit big hit lottery number update command (step S2319: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2320, and when the received command is not a unit big hit lottery number update command (step S2319: No), the process proceeds to step S2321.

<Step S2320>
In step S2320, the MPU 51 updates the unit big hit lottery number stored in the RAM 512 to the unit big hit lottery number included in the unit big hit lottery number update command. It should be noted that the number of lottery lotteries stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2407 in the ball performance suggestion image display process shown in FIG. 34, which will be described later, and the character mode type that suggests the rank of the lottery unit lottery is selected. Referenced for.

<Step S2321>
In step S2321, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing a process based on other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Hidden performance suggestion image display processing]
In the appearance performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2304 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the game setting value suggesting character selected according to the game setting value when a specific condition is satisfied corresponds to the number of lottery per unit big hit. Are displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 as an appearance performance suggestion image in the character mode selected in this manner. In the present embodiment, the specific condition for displaying the payout performance display image in the variable game state is that a jackpot lottery (variable game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). The specific conditions may be other conditions, and details thereof will be described as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed according to the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit jackpot, but instead of one or both of these performance information, other performance information (base information, The appearance performance suggestion image may be displayed on the basis of the continuous character ratio information, the character ratio information, or the like. Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the ball appearance suggestion image display process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot lottery counter set to 1000 in step S2403, which will be described later (step S2401), and determines whether the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 or not. Judgment is made (step S2402). That is, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the number of jackpot lotteries has reached 1000. When the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2403, and when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2402: No), The processing moves to step S2411.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the value of the jackpot lottery counter to 1000. Then, the MPU 51 acquires a game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2404), and selects a character type according to the game setting value (step S2405). That is, in the variable game state in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is notified, the special performance condition is that the number of big hit lotteries (the number of variable games) reaches 1000. It should be noted that the specific condition for displaying the appearance performance suggestion image in the variable game is not limited to the fact that the number of jackpot lotteries (the number of variable games) reaches 1000, but may be other conditions. For example, the number of jackpot lotteries (the number of variable games) reaches a predetermined number other than 1000, the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery continuously deviate from the predetermined number, It is also conceivable that a specific condition is that a specific performance is executed, and that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display an appearance performance suggestion image, and the lottery is won.

  Here, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character type that suggests a game setting value. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character selection table for selecting a game setting value suggesting character.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the game setting value suggesting character types are male character (hereinafter “Sam”), female character A (hereinafter “Marine”), female character B (hereinafter “Walin”), female character C (hereinafter “Warin”). “Urin”), a marine creature character A (hereinafter “Dugong”), and a marine creature character B (hereinafter “shark”). “Sam” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. “Marine” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3. “Warin” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 2. “Urin” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. “Dugong” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4). “Shark” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3). This point is also apparent from the game setting value suggesting character selection table shown in FIG.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the game setting value suggesting character selection table, when the game setting value is 4, “Sum” is most easily selected, and then “Dugong” is most easily selected. Other characters are less likely to be selected. When the game setting value is 3, “Marine” is most easily selected, followed by “Shark”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 2, “Warin” is most easily selected, and then “Dugong” is easily selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 1, “Urin” is most likely to be selected, and then “shark” is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters.

  In this way, “Sum” is easily selected when the game setting value is 4, suggesting that the game setting value is 4, and “Marine” is selected when the game setting value is 3. It is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3, and “Warin” is easily selected when the game setting value is 2, and becomes a character that suggests that the game setting value is 2. “Urin” is easily selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. Also, “Dugong” indicates that when the game setting value is 2 or 4, it is easier to select than when the game setting value is 1 or 3, and the game setting value is 2 or 4 (even). It is a character. Also, “shark” is easier to select when the game setting value is 1 or 3 than when the game setting value is 2 or 4, and suggests that the game setting value is 1 or 3 (odd number). It is a character.

<Step S2406>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected game setting value suggesting character is “Dugong” or “shark” (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether or not the selected game setting value suggesting characters are male characters and female characters A to C. If the game setting value suggesting character is “Dugong” or “shark” (step S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2409, and if the game setting value suggesting character is not “Dugong” or “shark” (step S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the game set value suggesting character is not “Dugong” or “shark” (step S2406: No), the MPU 51 obtains the unit big hit lottery number stored in the RAM 512 (step S2407), and the unit big hit lottery number (rank) ) To select the game type suggestion character mode type (step S2408). That is, when the game setting value suggestion character is other than “Dugong” and “shark”, the number of unit big lottery (rank) is suggested according to the mode of the game setting value suggestion character. Even when the game set value suggesting characters are “Dugong” and “shark”, the number of unit big lotteries (rank) may be suggested depending on the mode of the game set value suggesting character.

  Here, FIGS. 37 and 38 are diagrams illustrating an example of a character mode selection table for selecting the mode of the game setting value suggesting character. The character mode selection table is defined for each rank of the number of lotteries per unit jackpot. In this embodiment, “rank S” when the number of lottery per unit is 25 or more, “rank A” when the number of lottery per unit is 20 or more and less than 25, and the number of lottery per unit is 15 or more and 20 times. If the number is less than “Rank B”, the number of lottery per unit is 10 or more and less than 15 is classified as “Rank C”, or if the number of lottery per unit is less than 10 is classified as “Rank D”. A character mode selection table is defined for each rank.

  Moreover, in each character mode selection table, the character mode is prescribed | regulated for every game setting value suggestion character, and the mode which suggests a rank changes with game setting value suggestion character types. For example, in the case of “thumb”, the rank of the number of lottery per unit jackpot is suggested by the body shape. Specifically, it is “rank S” by being a super macho body shape, “rank A” by being a macho body shape (see FIG. 35), and “rank B” by being a fine macho body shape. It is suggested that it is “rank B” because it is a grit shape, and “rank C” because it is a grit shape (see FIG. 39A).

  In the case of “Marine”, the rank of the lottery per unit jackpot is suggested by the costume. Specifically, it is “rank S” because the costume is a kimono, “rank A” because the costume is Santa, “rank B” because the costume is Happi, If the costume is a bikini (see FIG. 35), it is “Rank B”, and if the costume is a tank top, it indicates “Rank C”.

  In the case of “Warin” and “Ulin”, the rank of the number of lottery per unit jackpot is suggested by the posture and the pose. In the case of “Walin”, it is suggested that the rank is higher in the order of wink, finger whistle, triangular sitting (see FIG. 35), upright posture and whispering posture. In the case of “Urin”, it is suggested that the rank is higher in the order of V sign, guts pose, OK sign (see FIG. 35), good sign and bye-bye.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the lottery per unit lottery is “rank S” (the number of lottery per unit big hit is 25 or more), the super macho body shape is most easily selected for “thumb”, but other body shapes In “Marine”, kimono costumes are most likely to be selected while other costumes are difficult to select. "V sign is most easily selected, but other poses are difficult to select. In other words, “Sam” is a super macho body shape, “Marine” is a kimono, “Warin” is winking, “Urin” is V sign. This suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank S”.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (B), when the number of lottery per unit is “rank A” (number of lottery per unit big is 20 or more and less than 25), the macho body shape is most easily selected in “thumb”, but the other The body shape is difficult to select. In “Marine”, Santa ’s costume is most easily selected while other costumes are difficult to select. In “Walin”, the finger whistle is most easily selected, but other postures and poses are difficult to select. In “Ulin”, the guts pose is most easily selected, while other poses are difficult to select. In other words, “Sam” has a macho body shape, “Marine” has Santa as a costume, “Warin” has a finger whistle pose, and “Urin” has a guts pose. This suggests that the number of lotteries per unit jackpot is “rank A”.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (C), when the number of lottery per unit lottery is “rank B” (number of lottery per unit big hit is 15 or more and less than 20), the “thumb” is most likely to select the fine macho body shape. In “Marine”, Happi's costume is most easily selected, while other costumes are difficult to select. It is difficult to select “OK sign” in “Ulin”, but it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, “Sam” is a thin macho body shape, “Marine” is a happi costume, “Warin” is sitting in a triangle, and “Urin” is posing for an OK sign. This suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank B”.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the number of lottery per unit lottery is “rank C” (number of lottery per unit big hit is 10 or more and less than 15), the “thumb” is most easily selected, Body shape is difficult to select, "Marine" is most likely to select bikini costumes while other costumes are difficult to select, and "Warin" is most likely to select an upright posture but other postures and poses are not easily selected In “Ulin”, the good sign is most easily selected, while other poses are difficult to select. In other words, “Sam” has a gully body shape, “Marine” has a bikini outfit, “Warin” has an upright posture, “Ulin” has a good sign, It is suggested that the number of lottery wins is “rank C”.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), when the lottery per unit lottery is “rank D” (the number of lottery per unit big lot is less than 10), the “thumb” is the most easily selected, while other types are selected. In “Marine”, the tank top costume is most likely to be selected while other costumes are difficult to select. In “Ulin”, bye-bye is most easily selected, but other poses are difficult to select. In other words, “Sam” has a rigorous body shape, “Marine” has a tank top, “Warin” has a whispering posture, and “Urin” has a bye-bye pose. This suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank D”.

<Steps S2409 and S2410>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 causes the sub-image display unit 38 to display an appearance performance suggestion image (step S2409). Specifically, if the game setting value suggestion character selected in step S2405 is other than “Dugong” or “shark” (step S2406: No), the game selected in step S2405 as the appearance performance suggestion image. The set value suggesting character is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in the manner selected in step S2408. On the other hand, when the game setting value suggesting character selected in step S2405 is “Dugong” or “shark” (step S2406: Yes), “Dugong” or “ “Shark” is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. Then, the MPU 51 turns on the suggestion image display flag indicating that the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 (step S2410), and ends the appearance performance suggestion image display process. .

  Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of the appearance performance suggestion image in the variable game. In the appearance performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39A, a “thum” in a crisp shape is displayed, which suggests that the game setting value is 4 and the number of lottery wins is “rank D”. In addition, in the appearance performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39B, the “Urin” of the OK sign pose is displayed, suggesting that the game setting value is 1 and the number of lottery wins per unit is “Rank C”. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, in order to allow the player to confirm the appearance performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 by displaying the appearance performance suggestion image that suggests the appearance performance in the variable game. In addition to being able to concentrate on the game, it is possible to guess and enjoy the appearance performance based on the appearance performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed as indicating the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit big hit. Here, the game setting value defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability). Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on the jackpot probability, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine. In addition, the number of unit big hits is the first prize until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls (for example, minus of 250) or until the number of shot balls (out balls) reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times that a transition determination is made when a game ball enters the mouth 314. In other words, the unit jackpot lottery count is an index indicating the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (the state that is in the low probability mode and not the short-time mode), and the game ball necessary until the jackpot lottery results in the jackpot Affects the number (the difference in the normal gaming state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on a plurality of performance information including the number of lottery per unit jackpot, it is possible to evaluate the difference ball in the normal gaming state, so the game performance of the gaming machine is It is possible to suggest the performance of the ball based on the index reflected more appropriately.

  Instead of one or both of the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit jackpot, the appearance performance may be suggested based on a base, a continuous character ratio, or a character ratio.

  Here, as described above, the base is a payout rate (a payout rate) in the normal gaming state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode), that is, the “out ball number” in the normal gaming state. This is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out between the “number of balls to be paid out at the general prize opening” and the “number of balls to be paid out at the first prize port”. Therefore, by suggesting the ball performance based on the base, it will affect the number of game balls (the difference ball in the normal gaming state) required until the lottery result in the big winning lottery in the normal gaming state becomes the big hit . Therefore, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine 10 by evaluating the ball performance based on a plurality of performance information including the base. Become.

  In addition, as described above, the consecutive character ratio is the total of the winnings for all winning awards (general award 313, first award 314, second award 315, and variable award 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is the ratio of the number of payout balls in the variable prize opening to the number of payout balls. In other words, the consecutive character ratio is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (the ratio of staying in the jackpot game state), and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening 316 (the rate of winning in the jackpot game state) It is an index showing. Therefore, the ball performance is evaluated based on a plurality of pieces of performance information including the continuous character ratio, so that the ball performance in the jackpot gaming state is reflected, so that the ball performance may be suggested more appropriately. It becomes possible.

  In addition, as for the ratio of the prizes, as described above, the total payout by winning a prize to all winning holes (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) for which a prize ball is paid out. The number of balls is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the second prize port payout balls and the variable payout port payout balls. In other words, the bonus rate is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (stay rate in the jackpot gaming state), the staying rate in the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the variable prize opening 316 and This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize at the second winning opening 315 (the winning rate in the big hit gaming state). For this reason, the ball performance is evaluated based on multiple performance information including the ratio of bonuses, so that the ball performance in the jackpot gaming state and the short-time gaming state is reflected. It becomes possible to do.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned play performance (game set value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio or feature ratio) or in place of one of these play performances, You may make it suggest a ball expected value. Here, the expected output value is, for example, the expected number of balls (paid game balls) with respect to the total number of game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). Expected number of balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) is equal to the expected number of balls (number of game balls to be paid out). The number is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and is less than 100% when the expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) is smaller. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the expected appearance value exceeds 100%, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the appearance performance. On the other hand, when the expected appearance value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous for the player, and the lower the value, the lower the appearance performance.

  In addition, the expected number of balls to be played (the number of payout game balls) is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation gaming state (high It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the jackpot gaming state and the theoretical number of balls in each gaming state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, a game setting value (a jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), a jackpot type allocation rate ( It is calculated on the basis of the number of lottery per unit jackpot, the ratio of bonuses, and the like. Further, the expected number of balls (number of paid-out game balls) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries per unit big, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) expected in other than the normal game state (time-short game state, probability variation game state and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of extended games for the first hit, the distribution rate of jackpot type (Figure 7 (C)), and calculated based on the number of theoretical differences in each jackpot type, the ratio of consecutive actors, the ratio of actors, and the like.

  Moreover, you may evaluate an expected appearance value as a fullness rate with respect to a borderline. Here, the border line is the number of jackpot lotteries required for a loan amount per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected appearance value to 100%, and this border line is the jackpot lottery probability It is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. That is, the border line is the number of lottery wins per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the difference ball becomes ± 0 when winning the jackpot according to the theoretical probability. Various borderline calculation methods have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls rented at 1000 yen / (average number of balls in jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls lent per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. In addition, the average number of balls played in a jackpot game is the number of balls played per jackpot game when the number of round games of the jackpot game is distributed according to a theoretical value. The total probability is an average jackpot winning probability in the case of distribution according to the theoretical value between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Then, the sufficiency rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio between the number of lottery per unit jackpot and the border line. When the borderline fill rate exceeds 100%, the greater the value, the more advantageous to the player. When the borderline fill rate is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the number of lottery per unit is 18 and the number of border lines is 20, the fill rate for the border lines is 90%, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this way, since the ball performance is evaluated based on the expected ball appearance value (including the border line), the ball performance considering the state of the nail and the surface property of the game board 31 can be evaluated. It becomes possible to suggest more appropriately.

  Moreover, when suggesting 3 or more of the ball performances among a plurality of ball performances, it is preferable to suggest the ball performance by combining indexes having different properties. For example, a game setting value related to the jackpot probability, the number of unit jackpot lotteries (or base, consecutive bonus rate, bonus rate) related to each winning opening 313 to 316, and the expected game outcome related to the jackpot probability and each winning slot 313 to 316 It is preferable to combine the value and suggest the ball performance. For example, when the game setting value is suggested by the character as in the present embodiment, and the number of lottery wins is merely suggested by the character mode, the output performance may be suggested by the character mode for the expected ball appearance value. preferable. In other words, when suggesting a performance of 3 or more, suggesting a performance of 3 or more by one character (suggesting target) rather than individually suggesting a performance of 3 or more by a plurality of characters, etc. Is preferred.

<Step S2411>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, when the value of the big hit lottery counter is not 0 (step S2402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestion image display flag set to ON in step S2410 is set to ON. (Step S2411). When the suggestion image display flag is set to ON (step S2411: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2412 and when the suggestion image display flag is set to OFF (step S2411: No). Then, the appearance performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
When the suggestion image display flag is set to ON (step S2411: Yes), the MPU 51 hides the appearance performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 (step S2412) and also suggests the image. The display flag is set to OFF (step S2413), and the appearance performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in the ball appearance performance suggestion image display processing executed when the variation pattern command is received, the ball appearance performance suggestion image is subtracted from the start of the variation game every time the number of variation games reaches 1000. An example has been described in which the output performance suggestion image is not displayed when it is displayed on the image display unit 38 and the next variable game is started. That is, the sub-image display unit 38 is used as an image display unit for displaying the appearance performance suggestion image. Therefore, while the game display effect is displayed in the sub image display unit 38 while the game display effect is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 to notify the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the player can display the ball performance. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the suggestion image is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of times of the variable game reaches 1000 times, the output performance suggestion image is continuously displayed on the sub image display unit 38 at least from the start to the end of the variable game. Although the case has been described, it is not always necessary to continuously display the variable game from the start to the end. For example, when a super reach production pattern or a special reach production pattern is selected as the production pattern, the basic production (non-reach production) from the start of change to the development of normal reach production is being executed (from the start of change). The output performance suggestion image is limited to the sub-image display unit 38 only during the period until the end of the basic effect) or until it is developed to the super reach effect (from the start of change until the end of the normal reach effect). It may be displayed. In this case, while the super reach effect or the special reach effect is being executed, the variable game effect can be executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in the sub image display unit 38. In addition, when executing the variable game effect on the sub image display unit 38 during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the image of the variable game effect may be displayed as an upper layer of the output performance suggestion image, An image of a variable game effect may be displayed after the performance suggestion image is not displayed. Further, in the variable game in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, when an effect pattern in which an effect or the like with a high degree of expectation is executed is selected on the sub image display unit 38, the sub image display is performed. The display of the appearance performance suggestion image in the unit 38 may be carried over to the next variable game after the next variable game and executed.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
In the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2308 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game are determined. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2501, the MPU 51 executes an opening effect determination process for determining an opening effect that is executed after the jackpot game is started until the opening / closing execution mode is started. In the opening effect determination process, a rank suggestion image that suggests the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries can be determined together with the opening basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is started.

  The opening basic effect is determined according to the value of the opening (OP) basic effect type counter based on the opening basic effect selection table defined for each game setting value. In the opening basic effect, a game setting value suggesting character can be displayed in the same manner as in the case where the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the variable game effect. The game set value suggesting character type and the game set value suggested by each game set value suggesting character are the same as the game set value suggesting character in the variable game effect. However, in the present embodiment, the game setting value suggesting character type includes “Dugong” indicating that the game setting value is an even number and “Shark” indicating that the game setting value is an odd number. The game setting value suggesting character type is “Sam” indicating that the game setting value is 4, “Marine” indicating that the game setting value is 3, and indicating that the game setting value is 2. There are four types, “Warin” and “Urin” which suggests that the game setting value is 1.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of an opening basic effect selection table referred to in the opening effect determining process.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the opening basic effect selection table, “no suggestion” is most easily selected as the opening basic effect even when the game setting value is any one of 1 to 4. Here, “no suggestion” is an effect that is different from an effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters that suggest game setting values are displayed as an opening basic effect (an effect in which no game setting value suggesting characters are displayed). Means to be executed. In other words, in the variable game state, the ball performance suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the number of unit big hit lottery reaches 1000 times. As a specific condition, an appearance performance suggestion effect is executed. In the opening basic effect selection table, “no suggestion” is set most easily so that the game setting value is prevented from being easily recognized by the player in the jackpot game. Thereby, when a game setting value is a low setting value unfavorable to a player, it can suppress that a player moves to the other gaming machine 10 in a short time. Then, the more the game setting value is advantageous to the player (the higher the jackpot winning probability), the easier it is to select “no suggestion”. That is, the higher the game setting value is, the more difficult the game setting value suggesting character is displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is the high setting value, and allows the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game setting value is the high setting value.

  In addition, as the opening basic effect selection table, a table with no “no suggestion” distribution may be adopted so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the opening effect. A table having the same probability that “” is selected may be adopted.

  When the game setting value is 4, “Sum” is easy to select after “No suggestion”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Sam”. When the game setting value is 3, “Suggest” “Marine” is easier to select after “None”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Marine”. When the game setting value is 2, “Walin” is easier to select after “No suggestion” Other characters are less likely to be selected than “Warin”. When the game setting value is 1, “Ulin” is easier to select after “No suggestion”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Ulin”.

  Thus, regarding the game setting value suggesting character, “Sum” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4 when the game setting value is 4 and is easily selected. In addition, since “sum” is not sorted (not selected) in the game setting value 1, the game setting value 1 is negated when the “sum” is displayed in the opening effect, and the game setting value 2 or more is determined. . In that sense, the “thum” in the opening effect is a character that determines that the game setting value is 2 or more.

  “Marine” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 3, and suggests that the game setting value is 3. “Warin” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 2. It is a character that suggests that the setting value is 2, and “Urin” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1 when it is easily selected when the game setting value is 1. And the probability that the game setting value suggestion character which suggests that it is the said game setting value is selected, so that a game setting value is a high setting value. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of “Sum” is 10/100, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of “Marine” is 15/100. When the setting value is 2, the selection rate of “Warin” is 20/100, and when the setting value of the game is 1, the selection rate of “Ulin” is 25/100. Thus, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult for the character that suggests the high setting value to be displayed in the opening effect. Thereby, in the opening effect, even when a character suggesting that the game setting value is a low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is a high setting value, the game setting value may immediately be a low setting value. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it is possible to advance the game while maintaining the player's expectation that the game setting value is a high setting value.

  As the opening basic effect selection table, a table may be adopted in which the probability that a game setting value suggesting character that suggests the game setting value is selected is the same for each game setting value.

  On the other hand, the rank suggestion image is determined in accordance with the value of the rank suggestion image type counter based on the unit big hit lottery number suggestion image selection table defined for each rank of the unit big hit lottery number. Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the rank suggestion image type, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the opening unit big hit lottery number suggestion image selection table.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the rank suggestion image includes images of a plurality of forms of whales (hereinafter “whale lucky”). Specifically, there are six types of rank-indicating images: “Kuji Kuki Lucky”, “GOLD Whale Lucky”, “GOO Whale Lucky”, “Normal Whale Lucky”, “BAD Whale Lucky” and “BLACK Whale Lucky”. Includes images. “Long life whale lucky” is an image that clearly indicates that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank S” (25 times or more). “GOLD Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank S”. “GOO Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank A” (20 to less than 25). “Normal whale lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lotteries per unit jackpot is “rank B” (15 to less than 20 times). “BAD Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank C” (10 to less than 15 times). “BLACK Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank D” (less than 10 times).

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the opening unit big hit lottery number suggestion image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined for each rank of the unit big hit lottery number according to the opening rank suggested image type counter. In this unit big hit lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the unit big hit lottery number is “rank S”, “GOLD whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other types of whale lucky are hard to be selected. When the unit big hit lottery is “rank A”, “GOO whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other types of whale lucky are hardly selected. When the unit lottery lottery number is “rank B”, “normal whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other types of whale lucky are hardly selected. When the unit big hit lottery is “rank C”, “BAD whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other types of whale lucky are hardly selected. When the number of lottery per unit hit is “rank D”, “BKACK whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other types of whale lucky are hardly selected. In addition, “sushi whale lucky” is distributed only when the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank S”.

  In this way, the “life luck lucky” is selected only when the lottery per unit big hit is “rank S”, and is a rank suggestion image that clearly indicates that it is “rank S”. “GOLD Whale Lucky” is a rank suggestion image that suggests that “GOLD Whale Lucky” is easy to be selected when the number of lottery per unit big hit is “Rank S” and is “Rank S”. “GOO Whale Lucky” is a rank suggestion image that is easily selected when the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank A” and suggests that it is “Rank A”. “Normal whale lucky” is a rank-indicating image that is easily selected when the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank B” and suggests that it is “rank B”. “BAD Whale Lucky” is a rank-indicating image that is easily selected when the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank C” and suggests that it is “Rank C”. “BLACK Whale Lucky” is a rank suggestion image that suggests that it is “Rank D” because it is easily selected when the number of lottery per unit big hit is “Rank D”.

  Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of an opening screen in the jackpot game. In the opening screen shown in FIG. 44 (A), “Sam” is displayed as the game setting value suggesting character as the opening basic effect, which suggests that the game setting value is 4, and the rank suggestion image “ "Is displayed, it is determined that the number of lottery per unit big hit is" Rank S ". In addition, in the opening screen shown in FIG. 44B, it is suggested that the game setting value is 2 by displaying “Warin” as the game setting value suggesting character as the opening basic effect, and “BLACK” as the rank suggesting image. By displaying “Kuji Lucky”, it is suggested that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “Rank D”.

<Step S2502>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2502, the MPU 51 executes an ending effect determination process for determining an ending effect that is executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the jackpot game ends. In the ending effect determination process, a rank suggestion image that suggests the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries is determined together with an ending basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended. The rank suggestion image determination process in the ending effect is executed in the same manner as the opening effect determination process in step S2502.

  Here, FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process, and FIG. 45 (B) is an example of a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table for ending effects. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), in the variable game state, the ball performance suggestion effect is executed on the specific condition that the number of lottery per unit hit reaches 1000 times. However, in the ending effect determination process, Similar to the opening, a performance-out suggestion effect is executed on the specific condition that a lottery based on the ending basic effect selection table is won. In the opening basic effect selection table, “no suggestion” is most easily selected as the ending basic effect even when the game setting value is any one of 1-4. Here, “no suggestion” is an effect different from the effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters suggesting game setting values are displayed (the effect in which no game setting value suggesting characters are displayed), like the opening basic effect. ) Is executed. As described above, “no suggestion” is most easily selected, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the game setting value in the jackpot game. Thereby, when a game setting value is a low setting value unfavorable to a player, it can suppress that a player moves to the other gaming machine 10 in a short time. Then, the more the game setting value is advantageous to the player (the higher the jackpot winning probability), the easier it is to select “no suggestion”. That is, the higher the game setting value is, the more difficult the game setting value suggesting character is displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is the high setting value, and allows the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game setting value is the high setting value.

  In addition, as the ending basic effect selection table, a table with no distribution of “no suggestion” may be adopted so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the ending effect. A table having the same probability that “” is selected may be adopted.

  When the game setting value is 4, “Sum” is easy to select after “No suggestion”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Sam”. When the game setting value is 3, “Suggest” “Marine” is easier to select after “None”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Marine”. When the game setting value is 2, “Walin” is easier to select after “No suggestion” Other characters are less likely to be selected than “Warin”. When the game setting value is 1, “Ulin” is easier to select after “No suggestion”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Ulin”. Further, only when the game setting value is 4, there is a distribution of “all”. When this “all” is selected, all the game setting value suggesting characters are displayed on the ending screen.

  Thus, regarding the game setting value suggesting character, “Sum” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4 when the game setting value is 4 and is easily selected. In addition, since “sum” is not sorted (not selected) in the game setting value 1, the game setting value 1 is negated when the “sum” is displayed in the ending effect, and the game setting value 2 or more is determined. . In that sense, the “sum” in the ending effect is a character that determines that the game setting value is 2 or more.

  “Marine” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 3, and suggests that the game setting value is 3. “Warin” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 2. It is a character that suggests that the setting value is 2, and “Urin” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1 when it is easily selected when the game setting value is 1. And the probability that the game setting value suggestion character which suggests that it is the said game setting value is selected, so that a game setting value is a high setting value. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of “Sum” is 15/110, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of “Marine” is 20/110. When the setting value is 2, the selection rate of “Warin” is 25/110, and when the game setting value is 1, the selection rate of “Ulin” is 30/110. Thus, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult for a character that suggests the high setting value to be displayed in the ending effect. Thereby, in the ending effect, even when a character suggesting that the game setting value is a low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is a high setting value, the game setting value may immediately be the low setting value. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it is possible to advance the game while maintaining the player's expectation that the game setting value is a high setting value.

  As the ending basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability that a game setting value suggesting character that suggests the game setting value is selected is the same for each game setting value may be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, a rank suggestion image is defined for each rank of unit jackpot lottery count according to the ending rank suggestion image type counter. . In this unit jackpot lottery suggestion image selection table, “GOLD whale lucky” is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is “Rank S”, and “GOO” when the unit jackpot lottery count is “Rank A”. “Normal Whale Lucky” is most easily selected when “Whale Lucky” is most easily selected, and the number of lottery per unit is “Rank B”, and “BAD Whale Lucky” is selected when the number of lottery per unit is “Rank C”. "Is most easily selected, and" BKACK whale lucky "is most easily selected when the number of lottery per unit big hit is" Rank D ". In addition, “sushi whale lucky” is distributed only when the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank S”.

  In this way, in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery suggestion image selection table, the “lifetime whale lucky” has a unit jackpot lottery count of “rank S” as in the opening effect unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table. "GOLD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of lottery wins per unit is "Rank S", and "GOO Whale Lucky" indicates that the number of lottery wins per unit is "Rank A". “Whale lucky” suggests that the number of lottery per unit is “rank B”, “BAD whale lucky” implies that the number of lottery per unit is “rank C”, and “BLACK whale lucky” is a unit big hit The rank suggestion image suggests that the number of lotteries is “rank D”.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of an ending screen in the jackpot game. In the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (A), “all members” is displayed as the game setting value suggesting character as the ending basic effect, thereby clearly indicating that the game setting value is 4, and “normal whale lucky” is displayed as the rank suggestion image. "Is displayed, it is suggested that the number of lottery per unit big hit is" Rank B ". In the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), “Marine” is displayed as the game setting value suggesting character as the ending basic effect, which suggests that the game setting value is 3, and “GOO whale lucky” is displayed as the rank suggestion image. "Is displayed, it is suggested that the number of lottery per unit big hit is" Rank A ".

<Step S2503>
Returning to FIG. 40, in step S2503, the MPU 51 determines an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario executed in the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario defines a combination of round game effects executed in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario is determined based on an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) described later. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario includes an effect scenario in which a performance information display image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a predetermined round game. Then, when an effect scenario in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario is determined, a round game character selection table (see FIG. 49 (FIG. 49) described later) is selected according to the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit jackpot. Based on A) and a round game unit big hit lottery number suggestion image selection table (see FIG. 49B), the appearance performance suggestion image displayed in the corresponding round is determined.

  47 and 48 are diagrams showing an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. Specifically, FIG. 47A is a 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot. (B) is a 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot. FIG. 48 is a 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario that is executed in the opening / closing execution mode in jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot. Is specified. In this 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, “◯” in the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table indicates a round game in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9, it appears in two rounds. An effect scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 10 to 14, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in three rounds is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 15 ~ 19, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, and in the case where the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined. . When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 25 to 79, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by the lottery has a round game in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. Is done. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, it is determined by lottery whether or not the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 47B, the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario that is executed in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variation jackpot. Is specified. In this 5R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, “◯” in the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table indicates a round game in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the production scenario type counter is 0 to 4 or 25 to 29, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 5 to 9 or 30. The production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 2 rounds in ~ 34 is determined, and the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 3 rounds when the production scenario type counter value is 10 to 14 or 35 to 39 When the value of the production scenario type counter is 15 to 19 or 40 to 44, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is decided, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24 or 45 to 45. In 49, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in five rounds is determined. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 50 to 79, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode of 5R probability variation jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by the lottery has a round game in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. Is done. In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R probability variation big hit game, it is determined whether or not the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed by lottery.

  As can be seen by comparing FIG. 47 (A) and FIG. 47 (B), in the case of 5R probability variation jackpot, there is a higher probability that an output ball performance suggestion image is displayed than in the case of 5R normal jackpot. As a result, in the case of 5R probability variation jackpot, it becomes possible to make the player who does not pay attention to the round game performance pay attention to the round game performance due to the relief of being a probability variation jackpot. Note that in the case of 5R probability variation jackpot, the probability that an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed may be lower than that of 5R probability variation jackpot, or may be the same probability as that of 5R normal jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table defines the effect scenario executed in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variation jackpot. . In the 16R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, “◯” in the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table indicates a round game in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9, it appears in two rounds. An effect scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 10 to 14, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in three rounds is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 15 ~ 19, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, and in the case where the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined, When the value of the production scenario type counter is 25 to 29, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 6 rounds is determined. When the counter value is 30 to 34, the effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 7 rounds is determined, and when the effect scenario type counter value is 35 to 39, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 8 rounds. When the scenario is determined, and the production scenario type counter value is 40 to 44, the production scenario in which the performance performance suggestion image is displayed in 9 rounds is determined, and when the production scenario type counter value is 45 to 49, the game is played in 10 rounds. An effect scenario in which a performance suggestion image is displayed is determined. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 50 to 54, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 11 rounds is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 55. ~ 59, the production scenario where the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 12 rounds is determined, and the production scenario type counter In the case of 60 to 64, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the 13th round is determined, and in the case of the production scenario type counter value 65 to 69, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the 14th round is determined. When the value of the production scenario type counter is 70 to 74, the production scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in 15 rounds is determined, and when the production scenario type counter value is 75 to 79, the appearance performance suggestion image is obtained in 16 rounds. A production scenario in which is displayed is determined.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the appearance performance suggestion image is always displayed in any of the round games 1R to 16R. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the player who does not pay attention to the round game effect pay attention to the round game effect due to the relief of being a promising big hit. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, an effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is not displayed may be determined as in the case of the 5R normal variation jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 49A is a diagram showing an example of a round game character selection table used when an effect scenario in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed is selected in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. 49 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion number suggestion image selection table used when an effect scenario in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process is selected. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the round game character selection table, “Sum” is most easily selected when the game setting value is 4, and “Marine” is most easily selected when the game setting value is 3. When the game setting value is 2, “Wallin” is most easily selected, and when the game setting value is 1, “Ulin” is most easily selected. In this way, in the round game production, as with the opening production and the ending production, “Sum” indicates that the game setting value is 4, and “Marine” indicates that the game setting value is 3. , “Warin” indicates that the game setting value is 2, and “Urin” is a character that indicates that the game setting value is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (B), in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined according to the round game rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery count. ing. In this unit jackpot lottery suggestion image selection table, “GOLD whale lucky” is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is “Rank S”, and “GOO” when the unit jackpot lottery count is “Rank A”. “Normal Whale Lucky” is most easily selected when “Whale Lucky” is most easily selected, and the number of lottery per unit is “Rank B”, and “BAD Whale Lucky” is selected when “Number C” is the number of lottery per unit "Is most easily selected, and" BKACK whale lucky "is most easily selected. In addition, “sushi whale lucky” is distributed only when the number of lottery per unit jackpot is “rank S”.

  In this way, in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, as in the case of the opening effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table and the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, the `` lifetime whale lucky '' Clearly indicates that the number of lottery per unit is “rank S”, “GOLD Whale Lucky” indicates that the number of lottery per unit big hit is “rank S”, and “GOO Whale Lucky” indicates that the number of lottery per unit big hit is "Rank A" suggests that "normal whale lucky" suggests that the number of lottery per unit is "rank B", and "BAD whale lucky" indicates that the number of lottery per unit is "rank C" This suggests that “BLACK Whale Lucky” has a lottery per lottery of “Rank D”. And has a suggested rank suggested image.

  Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a round game screen in the jackpot game. On the round game screen shown in FIG. 50 (A), a scenario in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game of the fifth round is selected as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario, and “marine” is selected as the game setting value suggestion character. By displaying, it is suggested that the game setting value is 3, and “GOLD whale lucky” is displayed as a rank suggestion image, which suggests that the number of lottery per unit big hit is “rank S”. Also, in the round game screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), a scenario in which an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game of the second round is selected as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario. ”Is displayed, it is suggested that the game setting value is 4, and“ Rainbow Whale Lucky ”is displayed as the rank suggestion image, thereby clearly indicating that the number of lottery per unit big hit is“ Rank S ” Yes.

<Step S2504>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2504, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 in the RAM 512. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the ending basic effect type determined in step S2502, and the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503 in the RAM 512. In response to this, the appearance performance suggestion image type to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the opening, opening / closing execution mode or ending is stored. Thereby, in the jackpot game, the sound output effect is executed by the speaker 26, and the lamp effect is executed by the electric decoration unit 27.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 transmits a jackpot game effect command indicating the contents of the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 to the display control device 6. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the content of the appearance performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect as necessary, the ending basic effect type determined in step S2502, as necessary. Depending on the content of the appearance performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect and the number of execution rounds, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503, and the appearance performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect as necessary. The contents are transmitted to the display control device 6. Thereby, in jackpot game, the image display including the appearance performance suggestion image is executed by the symbol display unit 341.

  In the present embodiment, a ball performance suggestion image that suggests the ball performance in a jackpot game can be displayed, so that the player can confirm the ball performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. In addition to being able to concentrate on the jackpot game, it is possible to guess and enjoy the appearance performance based on the appearance performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the jackpot game, the appearance performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in any of the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the jackpot game effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game. In this way, by making the player pay attention to the jackpot game effect, it is possible to convey the goodness of the jackpot game effect to the player with respect to the jackpot game effect that is easily neglected by the player.

  In the jackpot game, the appearance performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in any of the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending. The ball performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub image display unit 38.

  In addition, in the case of suggesting the ball performance in the jackpot game, as in the case of the variable game, instead of one or both of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number, the base, the consecutive feature ratio, the feature ratio, You may be made to suggest the appearance performance based on an expected appearance value and a borderline fullness rate. In other words, the ball performance suggested in the jackpot game is not limited to the combination of the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lotteries.

[Variable game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the variable game effect process (step S2005) of the sub timer interruption process, when the variable pattern command is received in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the big win lottery, the command determination process of FIG. A variable game effect corresponding to the effect pattern determined in step S2303 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like, and the appearance performance suggestion image determined in step S2304 is displayed in the sub image display unit 38. Executed.

[Big hit game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40 are executed. Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2309 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and the jackpot game effect is determined. If the start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602. If the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the process proceeds to step S2604.

<Steps S2602 and S2603>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2602) and executes an opening effect start process (step S2603). The production process ends. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2501 in the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. An opening effect start command for starting the image effect on the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted. As a result, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Is done.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to ON in step S2311 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and the round game effect start flag is ON. (Step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605. If the opening / closing execution mode start flag is off (step S2604: No), the process proceeds to step S2607.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
When the round game effect start flag is ON (step S2604: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF (step S2605), executes the round game effect start process (step S2606), and the jackpot The game effect process ends. In the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect in the corresponding round in the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario determined in step S2503 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. At the same time, a round game start command is transmitted to the display control device 6 to cause the symbol display unit 341 to start an image effect as a round game effect in the corresponding round. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. As a result, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Is done.

<Step S2607>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to on in step S2314 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on. If the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S2608, and if the ending start flag is off (step S2607: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S2608), executes the ending effect start process (step S2609), and ends the jackpot game effect process. To do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2502 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. Is transmitted to the symbol display unit 341 to start the ending effect. As a result, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the ending basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Is done.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2316 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON ( In step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2611, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2610: No), the jackpot game effect processing is ended.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2611), executes an ending effect end process (step S2612), and the jackpot game The production process ends.

  By the way, the player selects a gaming machine based on each reason and plays a game in the gaming machine. And, as a reference when the player selects a gaming machine, the game performance of the gaming machine can be cited. This payout performance is affected by the ease of winning at the first start winning opening and the general winning opening, that is, the frequency at which a jackpot lottery can be received and the payout rate. On the other hand, the ease of winning in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening is influenced by the physical state of the gaming machine, for example, the state of the nail placed on the gaming board, the surface property of the gaming board, etc. . Here, the nails placed on the game board have individual differences between the gaming machines at the shipping stage. In addition, the state of the nail changes with age, and there is an individual difference between gaming machines with respect to the degree of this change over time. There are also individual differences in the surface properties of game boards in the shipping stage and aging changes between gaming machines. Therefore, the ease of winning in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening also differs between the same type of gaming machines manufactured at the same time and installed in the same hall at the same time. Since the physical state of such a gaming machine can be confirmed from the outside, the player checks the physical performance of the gaming machine, confirms the performance of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is estimated to have a high performance. It is possible to select and play a game.

  On the other hand, as a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a gaming hall side can set a jackpot probability from a plurality of stages of jackpot probability (game setting value). In such a gaming machine, even if the performance of payout based on the ease of winning in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening is low, if the jackpot probability is set high, Due to the large number of balls, the total ball performance may be high. On the other hand, even if the performance of payout based on the ease of winning at the first start prize opening or the general prize opening is high, if the big hit probability is set low, Due to the small number of balls, the total ball performance may be low. In addition, the game hall side may increase the game setting value while adjusting the nail so that it is difficult for the game ball to win the first start winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine in which the game hall side can set the jackpot probability from multiple stages of jackpot probability (game setting value), it is advantageous for the player to play the game simply by confirming the physical state of the gaming machine from the outside. Whether it is a gaming machine cannot be determined.

  In addition, the jackpot probability (game setting value) is difficult to converge with a small number of trials and may win a jackpot with a higher probability than the actual jackpot probability, but wins a jackpot with a probability lower than the actual jackpot probability Sometimes. In addition, the ease of winning a game ball in the first winning opening or the like is difficult to converge in a short time game and varies. As a result, even if the ball performance is high, it gives up in a short time and moves to another game machine. Can happen.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the variable game or the big hit game, the appearance performance suggestion image that suggests the appearance performance can be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. Here, the appearance performance suggestion image is selected based on a plurality of indices including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the player can confirm the appearance performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and based on a plurality of indices including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10, It is possible to estimate the performance of the ball and to determine the performance of the ball individually for each of a plurality of indexes. Thereby, since the player can enjoy guessing the play performance of the gaming machine 10, the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, for a player who selects the gaming machine 10 on the basis of the appearance performance, the player may give up and move to another gaming machine in a short time despite the high appearance performance. However, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued for a long time despite its low level.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the appearance performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed on the sub-image display unit 38, but the display of the appearance performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed on the symbol display unit 341. Good. In this case, it is preferable to display an output performance suggestion image at a corner of the symbol display unit 341 such as the lower right corner of the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 52) so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the variable game effect. Further, the appearance performance suggestion image is not limited to that in which performance information is suggested by the character type and the character mode type. For example. As shown in FIG. 52, the performance information may be suggested by a combination of character mode and lines. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the first performance information such as the game setting value is suggested by the dialogue, and the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit big hit lottery is suggested by the character mode. . Further, in addition to or instead of displaying the speech on the symbol display unit 341, the appearance performance may be suggested by a voice effect by the speaker 26.

  In this embodiment, the appearance performance suggestion image simultaneously suggests the appearance performance based on a plurality of appearance information (game setting value and unit lottery number of lotteries). It may include a plurality of images corresponding to the (development performance). In this case, a plurality of appearance performance suggestion images may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, a plurality of appearance performance suggestion images may be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, as shown in FIG. The appearance performance suggestion image may be displayed on both the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38. In this way, the ball appearance performance is suggested by the plurality of images corresponding to the performance information (ball appearance performance), so that it is easy to estimate the ball output performance individually. Therefore, it becomes easy to determine whether the game is to be continued or stopped according to the performance of the ball that is important when the player selects a gaming machine.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, a first appearing performance suggestion image suggesting the first appearing performance such as a game setting value is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, and a unit jackpot is displayed at the lower right corner of the symbol display unit 341. The second appearing performance suggestion image that suggests the second appearing performance serving as the first performance information such as the rank of the number of lotteries is displayed at the overlapping timing. The first image appearance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and the second appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, so that the game is displayed on both the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-image display unit 38. Can attract attention. Thus, an opportunity for a player who is less interested in the game effect to be given attention to the game effect can be given, and the interest of the game effect can be conveyed to the player. In addition, the first appearing performance suggestion image and the second appearing performance suggestion image are displayed at the overlapping timing, so that the player matches the first appearing performance suggestion image and the second appearing performance suggestion image. Since it can be confirmed at the time, it is possible to easily determine the performance of the ball based on the two types of ball performance.

  Further, in the round game effect, the game setting value is suggested by the person character, and the rank of the unit big hit lottery is suggested by the specific character mode, but the character introduction image is displayed in the round game effect as shown in FIG. The first performance information such as the game setting value is suggested by the character type to be displayed and introduced, and the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit big hit lottery by the frame color of the character introduction image or the like. It may be suggested. Further, the second performance information may be suggested by the frame pattern, background color, etc. of the character introduction image.

  Also, in this embodiment, the appearance performance suggestion image can be displayed in both the variation game and the jackpot game, but the appearance performance suggestion image may be displayed in one of the variation game and the jackpot game, Further, in addition to or instead of one or both of the variable game and the jackpot game, a ball performance suggestion image may be displayed in a waiting state for waiting for a customer (a state in which a variable display is not held and a game ball is not being fired). . For example, in the waiting-by-customer state, the output performance suggestion image is displayed on condition that a predetermined operation (long press operation or continuous hitting operation) is performed on the operation button 20 or a command is input to the cross key (not shown). It is also possible to make it displayed.

  In variable games, a ball performance suggestion image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied as described above. As a specific condition in this case, for example, the number of launched game balls reaches a certain number. It is conceivable that an operation on the operation button 20 is performed at a timing such as immediately after the start or end of a variable game, or that a specific effect is executed. The specific effect in this case is preferably an effect that the player does not misunderstand that it is an effect that suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, for example, an effect that requires the player to make a left or right strike . The specific effect may be an effect such as an effect requesting an operation on the operation button 20. By executing the ball performance suggestion effect when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can expect the timing at which the ball performance suggestion effect is executed. Accordingly, the player can expect the timing at which the performance performance suggestion effect is executed and can proceed with the game while looking forward to the arrival of the timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In a jackpot game, it is only necessary to display an appearance performance suggestion image in at least one of the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending. In the opening / closing execution mode, in addition to or instead of the round game, an interval between round games is displayed. In this case, the appearance performance suggestion image may be displayed.

  In addition, the suggestion of the ball performance may be executed by an audio output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the lighting unit 27 in addition to or instead of the image effect. For example, the performance of the ball may be suggested depending on the type of music (BGM) output in the jackpot game. In addition, the performance of playing balls may be suggested by changing the music (BGM) during the jackpot game. In the case where the performance of the ball (BGM) is suggested by the change in the music (BGM), even if the player has not checked the symbol display unit 341 or the sub image display unit 38, the player can play the music ( It is possible to estimate the ball appearance performance based on (BGM). In addition, since the appearance performance suggestion effect is a music change effect, attention is paid to the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 in order to estimate the output performance even for a player who is indifferent to the music (BGM). It is possible to entertain the music (BGM).

  Moreover, when suggesting a ball performance by the change of a music (BGM), you may suggest a ball performance by the combination of the music before a change, and the music after a change. For example, it is conceivable that the performance of the game setting value or the like is suggested by the music type before the change, and other output information such as the number of lottery per unit jackpot is suggested by the music type after the change. When the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change suggests the performance of the ball, the player will not only play the ball based on the combination of the music before and after the change as well as whether or not the music changes. The performance can be estimated. Thereby, even a player who is indifferent to the music can be focused on the music output from the speaker 26.

  Further, when suggesting the ball performance by changing the music (BGM), the ball performance may be suggested by the timing at which the music is changed (for example, the round in the opening / closing execution mode). Specifically, in a round game corresponding to the game setting value (for example, 4 rounds when the game setting value is 4), the BGM may be changed with higher probability than other round games. Further, when the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3), the BGM is changed with higher probability in the odd number round than the even number round, and when the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4), the odd number is set. The BGM may be changed with higher probability in the even-numbered round than in the round. When suggesting the performance of a ball by the change of the music (BGM), it is possible to guess the performance of the ball depending on the number of round games in which the music has changed. Therefore, the player can estimate the performance of the ball not only based on whether or not the music change output from the speaker 26 occurs but also based on the number of rounds in which the music change occurs. Thereby, even a player who is not interested in the music can be focused on the music output from the speaker 26, and the symbol display is used to confirm the number of round games in which the music change has occurred. The display unit such as the unit 341 can be focused on. As a result, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the round game effect, and it is possible to convey the interest of the round game effect to the player.

  In addition, when suggesting the ball performance by the change of the music (BGM), it is also possible to suggest the ball performance by both the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change and the timing when the music is changed. It is done.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the rendering scenario in the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening / closing execution mode rendering scenario selection table including the opening / closing execution mode rendering scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed. The case where is determined has been described. That is, the case where it depends on the production scenario in which whether or not the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode has been described.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball exceeding the upper limit number (“9” in this embodiment) is won in the variable winning opening 316 in a round game (so-called over winning occurs), the round in the opening / closing execution mode It is different from the first embodiment described above in that a game performance suggestion image is displayed in a game. In this embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (see step S2503 in FIG. 40) of the jackpot game effect determination process, the opening / closing execution mode effect that does not include the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario in which the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed. It differs from the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment also in the point that the production | presentation scenario in opening / closing execution mode is determined based on a scenario selection table.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG.55 and FIG.56 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 5 of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, whether or not the round game end command and the variable prize winning command are received in the command determination process of the first embodiment described above. Judgment processing has been added.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 55, when the received command is not any of the variation pattern command, the jackpot game start command, and the round game end command (No in steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), the MPU 51 sends a round game end command. It is determined whether it has been received (step S2701). The round game end command is set when, for example, the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5.

  When the MPU 51 receives a round game end command (step S2701: YES), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect end flag to ON (step S2702). The round game effect end flag is referred to in step S2803 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. If the round game end command has not been received (step S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 in FIG.

<Steps S2703 and S2704>
When the MPU 51 has not received a round game end command (step S2701: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, the received command is an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery If it is not any of the number update commands (steps S2313, S2315, S2317, and S2319 are all No), it is determined whether or not a variable winning award winning command has been received (step S2703). Note that the variable winning award winning command is set in the RAM 412 together with the winning ball command when setting a winning ball command when, for example, a winning has occurred at the variable winning slot 316 in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. This is a flag transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

  When the MPU 51 receives the variable winning opening winning command (step S2703: YES), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning opening winning flag to ON (step S2704), and ends the command determination process. The variable winning opening prize flag is referred to in step S3001 of the payout performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 59 described later.

[Big hit game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, the contents of the round game effect start process are different from those of the first embodiment. Along with this, in the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, a ball performance suggestion image display process is added, and a process (step) necessary for the execution of the round game effect start process and the ball performance suggestion image display process is added. ing. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed by the sound lamp control device 5.

<Steps S2801 and S2802>
As shown in FIG. 57, in the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, the round game effect start process is executed on the condition that the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes). (Step S2801), the round game execution flag is set to ON (Step S2802). Details of the round game effect start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the round game execution flag is a flag indicating that a round game is being executed, and is referred to in step S2803 to determine whether or not to perform the appearance performance suggestion image display process.

<Steps S2803 and S2804>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game execution flag set to ON in step S2802 is set to ON. When the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a payout performance suggestion image display process (step S2804), and performs the jackpot game effect process. In the output performance suggestion image display process, when it is determined that the output performance suggestion image is to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38, a process for displaying the output performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 is executed. The In other words, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to display the ball performance suggestion image during execution of the round game, and the ball performance performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the round game. The details of the appearance performance suggestion image display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2805 to S2807>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag set to ON in step S2702 of the command determination process in FIG. 55 is set to ON. When the round game effect end flag is set to on (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game running flag indicating that the round game is being executed to off (step S2806). The game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S2807), and the jackpot game effect process ends. On the other hand, when the round game end flag is set to OFF (step S2805: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to 2607.

[Round game effect start processing]
In the round game effect start process executed in step S2801 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, a process of starting a round game effect is executed. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestion image display flag is set to ON. The suggestion image display flag is a flag for displaying the appearance performance suggestion image on the symbol display unit 341 in the round game, and is set to ON in step S3008 of the appearance performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 59 described later. . When the suggestion image display flag is set on (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2902, and when the output performance suggestion image display flag is set off (step S2901). : No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2802 and S2803>
When the suggestion image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the output performance suggestion image stored in the RAM 512 in step S3007 of the output performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The contents are read out (step S2902), and the contents of the appearance performance suggestion image are deleted from the RAM 512 (step S2903).

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 transmits a round game start command to the display control device 6. The round game start command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute an image effect of a round game effect. When the suggestion image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the round game start command includes information related to the appearance performance suggestion image type. Thereby, in a round game, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed.

[Hidden performance suggestion image display processing]
In the appearance performance suggestion image display processing executed in step S2804 in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 57, the presence / absence of display of the appearance performance suggestion image in the opening / closing execution mode and the image type are determined. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable winning a prize winning flag set to ON in step S2704 in the command determination process of FIG. 56 is set to ON. When the variable winning award winning flag is set on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3002, and when the variable winning award winning flag is set off (step S3001: No). Then, the appearance performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When the variable winning award winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3002) and sets the variable winning award winning flag to OFF (step S3002). S3003). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 316.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter (the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening 316) exceeds the upper limit. The “upper limit number” is set to the same number as the number of winning game balls in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed before a predetermined time (maximum opening time) elapses. 9 ”. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an over winning where a game ball exceeding the upper limit number has entered the variable winning opening 316 has occurred. Here, when the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005, and when the winning counter value does not exceed the upper limit number (step S3004: No). ), The ball performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Step S3005>
When the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game is the final round in the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005). When the round game is the final round (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the appearance performance suggestion image display process. In other words, when there is an over winning in the final round in the opening / closing execution mode, the appearance performance suggestion image is not displayed. On the other hand, when the round game is not the final round (step S3005: No), the MPU 51 determines the appearance performance suggestion image (step S3006) and stores the content of the appearance performance suggestion image in the RAM 512 (step S3007). . Then, the MPU 51 sets the currently appearing ball performance suggestion image display flag to ON (step S3008), and ends the present ball performance suggestion image display process. That is, when an over winning is generated in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 51 sets the flag for displaying a ball performance suggestion image on to turn on the next round game in which an over winning has occurred. In the round game, the performance performance suggestion image is displayed.

  By the way, in order to save the number of launched game balls in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, there is a so-called stop-attack technique in which the launch of the game balls in the interval is stopped. When such a stop-off is performed, the player repeatedly starts and stops the game ball while counting the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player gazes at the variable winning opening 316 without almost confirming the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38 in the round game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when an over win is generated in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open / close execution mode, an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the over win has occurred. Is done. Therefore, it becomes possible for a player who makes a stop-attack to launch an extra game ball for generating an overwinning, and to focus attention on the symbol display unit 341 in a round game. In particular, a player who makes a stop-attack has a strong tendency to place importance on the performance of balls as a criterion for selecting the gaming machine 10, and therefore, in order to draw attention to the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38, It is significant to display the performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 (or the symbol display unit 341 or both the sub image display unit 38 and the symbol display unit 341).

  Further, when the performance-out performance suggestion effect is executed in the next round game after the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 has been over won, the performance indication effect is executed in a short time after the over-winning. Therefore, it is easy for the player to grasp the timing at which the performance suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to confirm the performance suggestion effect.

  In the present embodiment, if there is an over winning in the final round of the opening / closing execution mode, the ball performance suggestion image is not displayed, but if there is an over winning in the final round, the ball performance suggesting image is displayed in the ending. It may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the ball performance suggesting effect is not executed when there is an over win in the final round game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in a variable game, a character in the ball performance suggestion image is selected based on a game setting value suggesting character selection table (see FIG. 36) selected according to the game setting value (FIG. 34). Steps S2404 and S2405 of FIG. 34) and the case where the character mode is determined based on the character mode selection table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) selected according to the rank of the unit big hit lottery has been described (FIG. 34). Steps S2407 and S2408).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the variable game, the game setting value and the rank of the unit big lottery number are converted into points, and the appearance performance suggestion image is based on the table selected according to the total point obtained by adding these points. This is different from the first embodiment in that it is determined and the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. In the following description, including the reference drawing, “summing point” may be expressed as “summing Pt”.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Hidden performance suggestion image display processing]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball performance suggestion image display process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the appearance performance suggestion image display processing, when the variation pattern command is received, if the value of the big hit lottery counter is “0” (step S2402: Yes), that is, the number of big hit lottery is 1000 times. If the value reaches the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit jackpot stored in the RAM 512 (steps S2404 and S2406), the summation point (summation Pt) is calculated (step S3101). Specifically, the MPU 51 calculates the summed point by summing the summed point set according to the game set value and the summed point set according to the number of lottery per unit big.

  Here, FIG. 61 (A) and FIG. 61 (B) are diagrams showing an example of a point table used in the appearance performance suggestion image display processing.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the set point table defines the addition points according to the game set values. In the setting point table, when the game setting value is 4, the addition point is 4 points. When the game setting value is 3, the addition point is 3 points. When the game setting value is 2, the addition point is 2 points. When is 1, the addition point is 1 point. That is, the game setting value addition point is set higher as the game setting value is higher, and the higher the point is, the higher the play performance is.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the lottery count point table defines the addition points according to the lottery count (rank) per unit big hit. In the lottery count point table, 5 points are added when the number of lottery per unit is 25 or more (rank S), and 4 points are added when the number of lottery per unit is 20 or more and less than 25 (rank A). If the number of lottery wins per unit is 15 to less than 20 (rank B), 3 points will be added. If the number of lottery per unit hit is 10 to less than 15 (rank C), 2 points will be added. When the number of jackpot lotteries is less than 10 (rank D), the addition point is 1 point. That is, the addition point of the lottery per unit lottery (rank) is set higher as the number of lottery per unit lottery increases (the higher the rank), and the higher the points, the higher the ball performance.

  As described above, in the setting point table shown in FIG. 61 (A), the higher the game setting value, the higher the addition point is set. In the lottery number point table shown in FIG. The higher the value), the higher the added points. Therefore, it is shown that the higher the summed points with the game set value and the number of lottery wins as indexes, the higher the payout performance. That is, the summed point is an index having a correlation with the game play performance of the gaming machine 10. For example, if the game setting value is 1 and the number of lottery wins per unit is 13, the addition point of the game setting value is 1 point, and the addition point of the lottery number per unit is 2 points, so the total points is 3 points. (1 point + 2 points), indicating that the performance of the ball is low. Further, if the game setting value is 3 and the unit big hit number of lotteries is 27, the total number of points is 8 points (3 points + 5 points), which indicates that the performance is high.

  In this embodiment, the summation point is calculated when it is determined that the number of jackpot lotteries has reached 1000 when the variation start command is received, but the timing for calculating the summation point is another timing. May be. For example, the summation point may be calculated every time a change start command is received.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 selects a character image (summed point suggesting character image) as an appearance performance suggesting image that suggests the summed point calculated in step S3101, and the selected character image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. It is displayed (step S2408). In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of lottery wins has reached 1000, a ball performance suggestion image is displayed. It may be displayed only in a variable game, for example, may be displayed across a plurality of variable games, or may be continuously displayed in a jackpot game.

  Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the combined point suggesting character selection table referred to in the appearance performance suggestion image display process.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the total point suggesting character selection table, when the total point (total Pt) is “8” or “9”, “Sum” is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to select. When the total point (total Pt) is “6” or “7”, “Marine” is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to select. When the total point (total Pt) is “4” or “5”, “Wallin” is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to select. When the total point (total Pt) is “2” or “3”, “Urin” is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to select.

  In this way, “sum” is easily selected when the summing point (summing Pt) is “8” or “9”, and the character suggesting that the summing point (summing Pt) is high (high ball performance). “Marine” is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is “6” or “7”, and the total point (total Pt) is relatively high (relative performance is relatively high). "Warin" is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is "4" or "5", and the total point (total Pt) is relatively low ( "Urin" is a character that suggests that the performance is relatively low), and "Urin" is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is "2" or "3", and the total point (total Pt) Is low (low performance) And it has a suggestive character and when).

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the appearance performance suggestion image is determined using a table prepared for each of the two pieces of performance information of the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit big win.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game setting value and the number of lottery per unit lottery are converted into points, and the ball performance is evaluated as a summed point, so the ball performance suggestion image is determined by one table. Therefore, in this embodiment, the storage capacity of the ROM 511 necessary for storing the table is reduced as compared with the first embodiment described above, and the arithmetic processing procedure can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed based on the summed point (outcome performance) in the variable game, but the appearance performance suggestion image based on the summation point (outlet performance) in the jackpot game. May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the total points of the addition points based on the game setting value and the addition points based on the unit big hit lottery number are used as an index indicating the performance of the ball, but the game setting value and the unit big hit lottery number It is also conceivable to set an index correlated with the appearance performance based on a combination of two or more pieces of performance information other than the combination, and suggest the output performance based on the index.

  In addition, instead of adding the addition points based on the game setting value and the addition points based on the number of lottery per unit jackpot, an index that subtracts, multiplies or divides these points to correlate with the ball performance is set. Alternatively, it is conceivable to set an index correlated with the ball output performance based on a predetermined mathematical formula, and suggest the ball output performance based on the obtained index.

  In addition, the performance information of one of the first performance information such as game setting values and the second performance information other than the first performance information is pointed out, and the game is based on an index combined with a numerical value indicating the other performance information. It may also indicate performance.

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

  Further, when determining the appearance performance suggestion image in the second embodiment described above, a method for selecting the appearance performance suggestion image (character image) in the appearance performance suggestion image display process in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the third embodiment described above, the game setting value and the rank of the lottery per unit lottery are converted into points, and the game performance based on the table selected according to the total points (game performance) obtained by summing up these points. The case where the suggestion image is determined has been described (see steps S3101 and S3102 in FIG. 60).

  On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the performance of the gaming machine 10 is calculated as an expected output value and performance information is suggested based on the expected output value.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Hidden performance suggestion image display processing]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the appearance performance suggestion image display process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the appearance performance suggestion image display process, when the variation pattern command is received, if the value of the big hit lottery counter is “0” (step S2402: Yes), that is, the big win lottery number is 1000 times. When reaching the above, the expected output value is calculated (step S3201).

  As described above, the expected output value is, for example, the expected number of balls (paid out) with respect to the total number of game balls launched (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number of game balls). Expected number of balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) is equal to the expected number of balls (number of game balls to be paid out). The number is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and is less than 100% when the expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) is smaller. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the expected appearance value exceeds 100%, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the appearance performance. On the other hand, when the expected appearance value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous for the player, and the lower the value, the lower the appearance performance.

  In addition, the expected number of balls to be played (the number of payout game balls) is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation gaming state (high It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the jackpot gaming state and the theoretical number of balls in each gaming state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, a game setting value (a jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), a jackpot type allocation rate ( It is calculated on the basis of the number of lottery per unit jackpot, the ratio of bonuses, and the like. Further, the expected number of balls (number of paid-out game balls) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries per unit big, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) expected in other than the normal game state (time-short game state, probability variation game state and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of extended games for the first hit, the distribution rate of jackpot type (Figure 7 (C)), and calculated based on the number of theoretical differences in each jackpot type, the ratio of consecutive actors, the ratio of actors, and the like.

  Moreover, you may evaluate an expected appearance value as a fullness rate with respect to a borderline. Here, the border line is the number of jackpot lotteries required for a loan amount per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected appearance value to 100%, and this border line is the jackpot lottery probability It is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. That is, the border line is the number of lottery wins per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the difference ball becomes ± 0 when winning the jackpot according to the theoretical probability. Various borderline calculation methods have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls rented at 1000 yen / (average number of balls in jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls lent per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. In addition, the average number of balls played in a jackpot game is the number of balls played per jackpot game when the number of round games of the jackpot game is distributed according to a theoretical value. The total probability is an average jackpot winning probability in the case of distribution according to the theoretical value between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Then, the sufficiency rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio between the number of lottery per unit jackpot and the border line. When the borderline fill rate exceeds 100%, the greater the value, the more advantageous to the player. When the borderline fill rate is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the number of lottery per unit is 18 and the number of border lines is 20, the fill rate for the border lines is 90%, which is disadvantageous for the player.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 selects a character image (a projected ball expected value suggesting character image) as a projected ball performance suggesting image that suggests the expected projected ball value calculated in step S3201, and selects the selected character image as a sub image. It is displayed on the display unit 38 (step S2408).

Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an expected ball appearance value suggesting character selection table referred to in the expected ball performance suggestion image display process, and FIG. 64 (B) is an expected value indicating a tank of expected ball appearance value. It is a figure which shows an example of a rank corresponding | compatible table.
It is.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the expected output value suggesting character selection table, expected output value suggesting character types are defined for each expected output rank according to the expected value suggesting effect selection table. Here, the expected output rank is an index indicating the magnitude of the expected output value. As shown in FIG. 64 (B), when the expected output value is 115% or more, “rank S”, The case where the ball expectation value is 105% or more and less than 115% is “Rank A”, the case where the ball expectation value is 95% or more and less than 105% is “Rank B”, and the ball expectation value is 85% or more and less than 95% “Rank C” is defined as “rank D”, and “rank D” is defined as a case where the expected output value is less than 85%. That is, in the expected appearance value rank, the expected output value is higher in the order of “Rank S”, “Rank A”, “Rank B”, “Rank C”, and “Rank D”. It is advantageous to the player in this order.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 64A, in the expected appearance value suggestion character selection table, when the expected output rank is “rank S”, “GOLD whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whales in other forms Lucky is hard to choose. When the expected ball rank is “rank A”, “GOO whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whale lucky in other modes is hardly selected. When the expected ball rank is “rank B”, “normal whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other forms of whale lucky are difficult to select. When the expected appearance rank is “rank C”, “BAD whale lucky” is most easily selected, and other forms of whale lucky are hardly selected. When the expected ball rank is “rank D”, “BKACK whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whale lucky in other modes is hardly selected. In addition, “life whale lucky” is assigned only when the expected appearance rank is “rank S”.

  In this way, the “life expectancy” is selected only when the expected ball rank is “rank S”, and is an expected ball value suggestion image that clearly indicates that it is “rank S”. “GOLD Whale Lucky” is an easy-to-select expected value suggestion image that suggests that “GOLD Whale Lucky” is “rank S” and is easily selected when the expected rank is “rank S”. “GOO whale lucky” is easily selected when the expected ball appearance rank is “rank A”, and is an expected ball appearance value suggestion image that suggests that it is “rank A”. “Normal whale lucky” is easily selected when the expected ball rank is “rank B”, and is an expected ball expected value suggestion image that suggests that it is “rank B”. “BAD Whale Lucky” is an easy-to-select expected value suggestion image that suggests that “Rank C” is easily selected when the expected expectation rank is “Rank C”. “BLACK whale lucky” is an easy-to-select expected ball suggestion image that suggests that it is “rank D” when the expected ball rank is “rank D”.

  By the way, in above-mentioned 3rd Embodiment, a ball appearance performance suggestion image is displayed based on two performance information, such as a game setting value and the number of lottery per lot. For this reason, the third embodiment described above has an advantage that the arithmetic processing is simple. On the other hand, the game setting value is an index that reflects the jackpot probability and has no correlation with the jackpot type allocation. In addition, the number of lottery wins per unit is related to the size of the number of lottery wins in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and there is a correlation with the appearance in the gaming state other than the normal gaming state Absent. Therefore, in the above-described third embodiment, the number of balls played in the jackpot gaming state (difference number), the average number of consecutive games with respect to the first hit, the number of balls played in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state (number of difference balls) Are not taken into consideration, and although there is an advantage as a simple technique, the appearance performance of the gaming machine 10 is not appropriately reflected.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball appearance performance is evaluated based on the total expected ball appearance value including the game state other than the normal game state, and the ball appearance performance is suggested. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the player's ball performance based on performance information that appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine 10.

  In this embodiment, in the variable game, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed based on the expected appearance value (output performance), but in the big hit game, the appearance performance suggestion image is displayed based on the expected appearance value. It may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

  Further, when determining the appearance performance suggestion image in the second embodiment described above, a method for selecting the appearance performance suggestion image (character image) in the appearance performance suggestion image display process in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the sub-image display unit 38 suggests the appearance performance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit, and the game setting value can be visually recognized by the downward movement of the staying box arranged on the front side of the special main display unit. This is different from the embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 65 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a croon device 36 (an example of a sorting device) and a staying box 39 (visual restriction means) are provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 341 in the game board 31. A discharge port 319 and a special main display unit 37a (performance information display means) are provided.

  67 is a perspective view showing an example of the croon device 36, FIG. 68A is a sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68B is taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the cruising device 36 distributes the game balls launched in the right area of the game board 31 to either a normal entrance 367 and a special out ball 363, which will be described later. . The croon device 36 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 361 and an annular peripheral wall 362 surrounding the bottom wall 361. The bottom wall 361 has a circular shape in plan view, and includes a high-level bottom 361a, a low-level bottom 361b, and a slanting part 361c that is provided between the high-level bottom 361a and the low-level bottom 361b.

  The high-order bottom portion 361a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward to the right. A special out ball passage 364 having a special out ball outlet 363 (special discharge port) is provided in the high-level bottom portion 361a. The special out ball passage 364 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 361c and extending in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high-order bottom portion 361a in the front-rear direction D1. As will be described later, the special out ball passage 364 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the special out ball port 363 to the staying box 39, and has a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Is formed. Then, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 363 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. For this reason, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball 363 is not expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it passes through the special out ball 363, or special When it is introduced into the out ball passage 364, it is handled as an out ball.

  The special out ball opening 363 is an upper opening of the special out ball passage 364 and is open at the high-level bottom portion 361a. Further, the special out ball opening 363 is surrounded by an inhibition wall 365 (inhibition means) protruding upward from the high-level bottom 361a. The inhibition wall 365 inhibits the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, and includes a large inhibition wall 365a and a small inhibition wall 365b.

  The large inhibition wall 365a is provided in the right half of the peripheral portion of the special out lens mouth 363. That is, the large inhibition wall 365 a is provided in a portion near the peripheral wall 362 and far from the inclined portion 361 c, and inhibits the entry of the game ball 99 from the right half side of the special out lens mouth 363. Further, the height dimension of the large inhibition wall 365 a is set larger than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, the special out ball mouth 363 cannot be expected to enter the game ball 99 from the large inhibition wall 365a side.

  On the other hand, the small inhibition wall 365 b is provided in the left half of the peripheral portion of the special out lens mouth 363. That is, the small inhibition wall 365b is provided at a portion far from the peripheral wall 362 and near the inclined portion 361c, and inhibits the entry of the game ball 99 from the left half side of the special out lens mouth 363. Further, the height dimension of the small inhibition wall 365 b is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, compared to the game ball 99 from the large inhibition wall 365a side (the right half side of the special out ball opening 363), the small inhibition wall 365b side (the special out ball opening 363 has a special out ball mouth 363 side. The game ball 99 can be expected to enter from the left half side).

  The lower bottom portion 361b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the center. A normal passage 368 having a normal entrance 367 is provided in the lower bottom portion 361b. The normal passage 368 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 361c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 362 in the lower bottom portion 361b. The normal passage 368 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the normal entrance 367 to the lower right of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having an opening area larger than that of the special out end 363. Is formed. In addition, a guide member 369 for discharging the game ball 99 passing through the normal passage 368 from a certain position is connected to the lower end portion of the normal passage 368. The guide member 369 has a smaller sectional area on the lower side than the upper side, and the lower portion of the guide member 369 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 99.

  In such a cruising device 36, the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 moves on the bottom wall 361 along the peripheral wall 362. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the cruising device 36. And, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361, for example, by colliding with the peripheral wall 362 and the inhibition wall 365 of the clune device 36, and other game balls 99 because the kinetic energy becomes small, The ball enters the normal entrance 367. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal entrance 367 moves through the normal passage 368 and the guide member 369 and is released from a certain position. The game ball 99 released from a certain position can enter the second winning opening 315 and the variable winning opening 316, and can pass through the through gate 317.

  On the other hand, a part of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 (for example, 0.01% to 1%) is changed in moving direction at the periphery of the normal entrance 367 and collides with other game balls 99. For example, the special out ball mouth 363 moves toward the small inhibition wall 365b, gets over the small inhibition wall 365b, and enters the special out ball mouth 363. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 363 moves along the special out ball passage 364 and is discharged toward the staying box 39.

  In the present embodiment, the special out ball opening 363 is provided in the higher bottom portion 361 a of the bottom wall 361, and the normal entrance hole 367 has a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 363, and the special out ball opening 363 is obstructed. Since it is surrounded by the wall 365, the special out ball opening 363 is remarkably difficult to enter the game ball 99 compared to the normal entrance 367, but instead of all or a part of these, or In addition, it is conceivable that the game ball 99 is difficult to enter the special out ball outlet 363 by other means. For example, generating a magnetic force or electromagnetic force repelling the game ball 99 in the peripheral part of the special out ball outlet 363, forming an air curtain by blowing out air in the peripheral part of the special out ball mouth 363, special out It may be possible to arrange an obstacle (a form different from the inhibition wall 365) that obstructs entry into the ball mouth 363.

  Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the staying box 39 and its periphery when the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along line X3-X3 in FIG. 70A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69B showing the staying box 39 and its periphery when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, and FIG. 70B is a staying box 39 at the lower limit position. FIG. 70C is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C showing the staying box 39 and its surroundings, and FIG. 70C shows the staying box 39 when the staying box 39 is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. And FIG. 70D is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C showing the staying box 39 and its periphery when the staying box 39 is in the intermediate position. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, the staying box 39 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36, and keeps the game ball 99 inside until a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is intended to stay. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is that a certain time has elapsed since the staying box 39 is moved down to a lower limit position described later (see FIGS. 70A and 70B). The stay box 39 has an upper opening 391 that allows the game ball 99 to be received. The stay box 39 has a front wall 392a, a rear wall 392b, a left side wall 392c, a right side wall 392d, and a bottom wall 392e, and a stay space 393 in which a predetermined number of game balls 99 are held by these walls 392a to 392e is defined. Has been. Further, the staying box 39 is entirely opaque (for example, black or white) so that the back side of the staying box 39 is invisible or difficult to see.

  The stay box 39 has an upper limit position (see FIG. 69) covering the entire front surface of the special main display portion 37a and a lower limit position (FIG. 70 (A) and FIG. 70) where the entire stay box 39 is positioned below the special main display portion 37a. (See (B)) can be moved in the vertical direction D2. As shown in FIG. 71, the staying box 39 is driven by a motor 39 a connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the staying box 39 is moved downward when the motor 39a is normally rotated by the MPU 51, for example, and is moved upward when the motor 39a is reversely rotated by the MPU 51. The motor 39a is, for example, a stepping motor, and the staying box 39 is enabled at a predetermined position by controlling the number of drive pulses input to the motor 39a.

  As shown in FIGS. 70C and 70D, the staying box 39 can be stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions set between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. When the staying box 39 is located at a plurality of intermediate positions, a part of the special main display part 37a is visible, and the opening 394 of the staying box 39 does not communicate with the discharge port 319 of the game board 31. That is, when the staying box 39 is in the intermediate position, the game ball 99 in the staying box 39 stays in the staying box 39 without being discharged to the outside. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the staying box 39 can be stopped at three intermediate positions corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 73 and 74). It is possible to determine whether the segment A of the special main display unit 37a is turned on or off at the middle position of the lower movement level 1, and whether the segments B and F of the special main display unit 37a are turned on or off at the middle position of the lower movement level 2. It is possible to determine whether the segment G of the special main display portion 37a is turned on or off at an intermediate position of the lower movement level 3. The intermediate position is added to the positions corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3, or instead of at least one of the positions corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3, for example, the segments C and E of the special main display portion 37a. You may set to the position which can judge lighting or light extinction, the position which can judge lighting or light extinction of the segment D of the special main display part 37a. And the range which can visually recognize special main display part 37a differs in each intermediate position, and the range which can recognize special main display part 37a becomes large as dwelling box 39 approaches a lower limit position. Further, the position of the staying box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls staying inside (the number of staying game balls), and the position is lower as the number of staying game balls is larger (see FIG. 74C). This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

  The staying box 39 is not necessarily opaque as a whole, and it is sufficient that at least one of the front wall 392a and the rear wall 392b is opaque. Further, the stay box 39 is allowed to be transparent in a range where the special main display portion 37a is invisible or difficult when it is in the upper limit position.

  An opening 394 is formed in the lower part of the rear wall 392b of the staying box 39. As shown in FIGS. 70C and 70D, the opening 394 communicates with a discharge port 319 that penetrates the game board 31 when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position. As a result, when the stay box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position, the game ball 99 of the stay box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. Further, the bottom wall 392e of the staying box 39 is inclined so that its upper surface becomes lower as it goes rearward. Thereby, when the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 are communicated with each other, it is promoted that the game ball 99 of the staying box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. The

  Further, a special out ball sensor 35 a is provided in the vicinity of the upper opening 391 on the left side wall 392 c of the staying box 39. The special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the stay box 39, and is, for example, a reflective optical sensor. Of course, as the special out ball sensor 35a, other types of known sensors such as a transmissive optical sensor and an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor can be used. Further, the special out ball sensor 35 a may be provided in the special out ball passage 364 of the croon device 36.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the special out ball sensor 35a is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 35a, so that the MPU 41 plays a game in the stay box 39. It is determined whether or not the ball 99 has been entered. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the staying box 39, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command, and the special out ball detection command is voiced in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Transmit to the lamp controller 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 controls the motor 39a to execute the stay box lowering process for moving the stay box 39 downward (FIGS. 76 and 77). reference). Further, when the staying box 39 is moved to the lower limit position, the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed. Details of this point will be described later in the staying box return process of FIG.

  The special out ball sensor 35a may be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but in the voice lamp control device 5, the staying box is moved based on the output from the special out ball sensor 35a.

  72A is a front view showing an example of the special main display unit 37a, and FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a display example of the special main display unit 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 72A, the special main display unit 37a is configured by a so-called 7-segment display, and includes seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually. As shown in FIG. 72 (B), the special main display unit 37a displays the game setting values stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. The game setting value stored in the RAM 412 by the MPU 41 is read out to the special main display section 37a in the initialization process or the activation process executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A numerical value corresponding to is displayed. Specifically, when the game setting value is 1, the special main display portion 37a displays the number 1 by turning on the segments B and C, and when the game setting value is 2, the segment A and segment A are displayed. , B, D, E, and G are lit, and the number 2 is displayed. When the game setting value is 3, the segments A to D and G are lit, and the number 3 is displayed. When the set value is 4, the segments B, C, F, and G are turned on to display the number 4, and when the game set value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are turned on. As a result, the number 5 is displayed. When the game setting value is 6, the segments A and C to G are turned on to display the number 6.

  In the special main display section 37a, after the game setting value is displayed in the initialization process or the activation process, the game setting value is continuously displayed until the main power is turned off. When the game setting value is changed, the changed game setting value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a. For example, when the changed game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 in step S1709 of the game setting value change process of FIG. 20, the changed game setting value may be displayed on the special main display unit 37a. It is done. Moreover, the special main display part 37a should just be able to display the number of 1 to 6 at least, for example, may be displays other than 7 segment displays, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic electroluminescent display.

  Here, FIGS. 73 (A) to 73 (C), 74 (A), and 74 (B) are diagrams schematically illustrating the state of visual recognition of the special main display portion 37a at each lower movement level. In these drawings, only the portion of the staying box 39 located in front of the special main display portion 37a is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the lowering level of the staying box 39 has five levels of lowering levels 0-4. Further, as the lowering level of the staying box 39 is higher (as the number of the lowering level is larger), the staying box 39 is positioned below, and an area where the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized becomes larger.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73A, at the downward movement level 0, the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position, and the front side of the special main display portion 37a is entirely covered by the staying box 39, and the special main It is in a state where the entire display unit 37a is not visible. That is, at the lower movement level 0, the game setting value cannot be determined at all.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), at the lower movement level 1, a part (upper half) of the segment A of the special main display part 37a is visible. That is, at the lower movement level 1, it can be confirmed that the segment A is turned on and off. Then, in the lower movement level 1, when the segment A is lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6. When the segment A is unlit, the game setting value is It can be determined that either 1 or 4. In other words, at the lower movement level 1, whether the game setting value is 1 or 4 or the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6 can be determined by turning on or off the segment A. .

  As shown in FIG. 73 (C), at the lower movement level 2, the entire segment A of the special main display portion 37a is visible, and a part (upper half) of the segments B and F is visible. That is, at the lower movement level 2, in addition to turning on and off the segment A, it is possible to confirm the turning on and off of the segments B and F. Then, at the lower movement level 2, when the segment B is turned on and the segments A and F are turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and when the segments B and F are turned on and the segment A is turned off. It can be determined that the game setting value is 4. Also, when the segments A and B are lit and the segment F is unlit, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3, and when the segments A and F are lit and the segment B is unlit It can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the lower movement level 2, depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A, B, and F, whether the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, or the game setting values are 2 and 3 It can be determined whether it is any one of the game setting values 5 and 6.

  As shown in FIG. 74A, at the lower movement level 3, all of the segments A, B, and F of the special main display portion 37a are visible, and a part (upper half) of the segment G is visible. is there. That is, at the lower movement level 3, in addition to turning on and off the segments A, B, and F, it is possible to confirm the turning on and off of the segment G. At the down movement level 3, when the segment B is turned on and the segments A, F and G are turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, the segments B, F and G are turned on and the segment A is turned off. It can be determined that the game setting value is 4 when When segments A, B, and G are lit and segment F is unlit, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3, segment A, F, and G are lit and segment B is unlit. It can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the lower movement level 3, whether the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, or the game setting value is 2 depending on the combination of turning on and off each of the segments A, B, F, and G. And 3 or game setting values 5 and 6 can be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (B), at the downward movement level 5, the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, and all of the seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible. That is, at the lower movement level 0, the game setting value can be clearly confirmed.

  Here, FIG. 74C is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of staying game balls in the stay box 39 and the lowering level of the stay box 39. As shown in FIG. 74C, the downward movement level of the staying box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls staying in the staying box 39 (the number of staying game balls). Specifically, the downward movement level of the staying box 39 is 0 when the staying game ball number is 0, and the staying box 39 is 1 when the staying game ball number is 1; When the number of staying game balls is 2, it is 2, when the number of staying game balls is 3, it is 3, and when the number of staying game balls is 4, the staying box 39 is 4 at the lower limit position. As described above, when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, the number of staying game balls in the staying box 39 becomes 0 because the game balls staying in the staying box 39 are discharged to the outside. The staying box 39 is moved to the upper limit position after a certain period of time after the staying box 39 is moved to the lower limit position.

  Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 when the stay box 39 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position and returned from the lower limit position to the upper limit position will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. To do.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) are performed in the same manner as the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment described above. A counter update process (step S2003), a command determination process (step S3301), a variable game effect process (step S2005), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of the present embodiment differs from the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above in some steps. Also, in the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the staying box return process is executed (step S3302), unlike the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment described above.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the command determination processing of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If it is neither of these (No in steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3401). The special out ball detection command is a command that is set when the special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the staying box 39 as described above. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301.

  When the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3401: YES), the MPU 51 executes a stay box downward movement process (step S3402).

[Still box lowering process]
In the stay box lowering process, a process in which the stay box 39 is moved down to a position corresponding to the lowering level (see FIG. 74C) corresponding to the number of game balls staying in the stay box 39 is executed. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the stay box downward movement process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 77, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter added in step S3505 described later is zero. Here, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3502, and when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 0 (step S3501: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S3504.

<Step S3502>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the staying box return counter to a predetermined value. Here, the staying box return counter is a counter for determining the timing of returning to the upper limit position corresponding to the downward movement level 0 when the staying box 39 is moved downward, and the staying box return process of FIG. 78 described later. In step S3603. Note that the value of the stay box return counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the downward movement of the stay box 39 is started until it is returned to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0). Is done.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 sets the staying box return standby flag to ON. Here, the staying box return waiting flag is a flag indicating that the staying box 39 is waiting to return to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) when the staying box 39 is moved downward. Reference is made to step S3601 in the return processing.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the staying box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position, and determines whether or not the staying box 39 is further moved down. When the value of the downward movement level counter is 4 (step S3504: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the staying box downward movement process. When the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), or when the staying box return standby flag is turned on (step S3503), the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter indicated at the position of the staying box 39 to 1 is added (step S3505), and the staying box 39 is moved downward to a position corresponding to the downward movement level corresponding to the value of the downward movement level counter after the addition (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 stays at a position corresponding to the lower movement level that is one level higher than the lower movement level before receiving the special out ball detection command by controlling the drive pulse input to the motor 39a (see FIG. 71). Box 39 is moved down. For example, when the lower movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the staying box 39 is moved from the upper limit position (see FIG. 73A) covering the entire front surface of the special main display portion 37a to the special main display portion 37a. The segment A is moved downward to a position where the upper half of the segment A is exposed (see FIG. 73B). Further, when the downward movement level is changed from 1 to 2, the staying box 39 is moved downward from the position shown in FIG. 73 (B) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C). 73 is moved from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C) to the position shown in FIG. 74 (A), and when the lower movement level is changed from 3 to 4, FIG. 74 (A). Is moved down to the lower limit position shown in FIG. When the lower movement level is changed from 0 to 1, when the segment A of the special main display part 37a is lit, it can be estimated that the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6, When segment A is turned off, it can be estimated that the game setting value is either 1 or 4. Then, when the down movement level is changed from 1 to 3, the number of estimated game setting values decreases step by step by turning on or off the segments that are visible according to the down movement level. The set value can be narrowed down gradually. And in the downward movement level 4, since all the seven segments AG of the special main display part 37a can be visually recognized, a game setting value can be recognized. Thereby, the player estimates the game setting value step by step according to the number of special out balls (the number of segments visible in the special main display portion 37a), and the more the number of special out balls, the more accurate the estimation. Since it is possible to improve in stages, it is possible to enjoy the process of guessing the game setting value.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a part or all of the game setting values displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized by a simple method of moving the staying box 39 downward. The state can be realized.

  In addition, since the staying box 39 is moved down step by step every time a game ball enters the special out ball outlet 363, the viewable area of the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is gradually expanded. Is done. Thereby, since the game setting value displayed on the special main display part 37a becomes gradually clear, the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed until the game setting value can be grasped. Thereby, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be grasped can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Restoration processing for staying box]
In the staying box return process, a process of returning the staying box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is performed after a lapse of a certain time after the staying box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 78, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the staying box return waiting flag set to on in step S3505 in the staying box downward moving process of FIG. 77 is set to on. When the staying box return waiting flag is set on (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3602, and when the staying box return waiting flag is set off (step S3601: No). Then, the staying box return process is terminated.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
If the staying box return waiting flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the staying box return counter set in step S3504 in the staying box lowering process of FIG. In step S3602, it is determined whether the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain time has elapsed since the staying box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position. When the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604, and when the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3603: No). ), The staying box return processing is terminated.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
If the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position by controlling the drive pulse to be input to the motor 39a ( Step S3604). Thereby, since the time for which the entire special main display unit 37a is displayed is restricted to a certain time, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left for a long time in a visible state. Thereby, it can suppress that the game setting value is grasped | ascertained by the player who is not playing a game. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S3605), sets the staying box return waiting flag to off (step S3606), and ends the staying box return process.

  By the way, in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, the game setting value is suggested or clearly indicated by the symbol display unit 341 or the sub image display unit 38. However, in the above-described first embodiment, the game setting value is suggested or specified as part of the performance, so that the gameability is poor. In particular, in jackpot games, the jackpot game effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc., but if the player is not interested in the jackpot game effect, the jackpot game will digest the number of round games according to the jackpot type And lacks playability.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the right hit such as a big hit game, the game ball 99 stays step by step by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36 that is difficult to enter. The box 39 moves downward, and the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be gradually confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 in the clune device 36 enters the special out ball outlet 363 when the player hits the right such as a big hit game. In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball outlet 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear, so that the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. Thereby, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the staying box 39 is moved from the upper limit position toward the lower limit position by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36 (detection of the game ball 99 by the staying box 39). However, the staying box 39 may be moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball outlet 363. In this way, when the game ball enters the special out ball outlet 363, the staying box 39 changes from the upper limit position where the game setting value is not visible or difficult to see to the lower limit position where the entire game setting value is visible. Moved. For this reason, when a game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 363, a game property that the game setting value is immediately visible is given, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, each time one game ball 99 enters the special out ball outlet 363, the stay box 39 moves down, but each time a plurality of game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 363, the stay box 39 is stepped. Alternatively, it may be moved down at a stroke. Further, the staying box 39 is moved downward to enlarge the visual recognition area, but may be moved upward to enlarge the visual recognition area, or may be moved leftward, rightward, diagonally, etc. By doing so, the visual recognition area may be enlarged.

  Further, the stay box 39 may be moved down by the weight of the game ball 99 staying in the stay box 39. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the staying box 39 is biased upward by biasing means (viewing state control means) such as a coil spring. By doing so, the staying box 39 can be moved down stepwise according to the number of game balls staying inside, and the staying box 39 can be moved up by discharging the game balls in the staying box 39.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special main display unit 37a is moved down by the stay box 39 being moved down when the game ball 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball opening 363. Although the displayed game setting value is visible, the staying box 39 is moved when the game ball 99 launched into the left area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball opening 363. The game setting value displayed on the special main display part 37a may be made visible. In this case, the special main display part 37a, the clown device 36, the staying box 39, and the like are arranged in the left area or the central area of the game board 31.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 are distributed to the normal entrance 367 or the special out ball outlet 363 by the clune device 36, but a distribution device having another configuration can also be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball outlet 363, but other specific conditions are set. By satisfying, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be visible. Other specific conditions include, for example, that the number of lottery wins reaches a predetermined number, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery continuously deviate a predetermined number of times, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery become a big hit a predetermined number of times, For example, the total number of the game balls to be fired becomes a certain number or more, the difference ball becomes a predetermined number or more plus, the difference ball becomes a certain number or more minus. When at least a part of the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is visible when the exemplified specific condition is satisfied, the player can visually recognize at least a part of the game setting value. Can be expected. Accordingly, the player can expect the timing at which the game setting value is displayed and can proceed with the game while looking forward to the arrival of the timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when the game setting value displayed on the special main display part 37a is made visible by satisfying other conditions, an opaque plate-like member is used as the front position of the special main display part 37a instead of the staying box 39. The game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a changes between a state in which it is invisible or difficult to view and a state in which it is visible by moving downward between the lower position and the upper position of the special main display unit 37a. You may do it.

  Further, in the special main display section 37a, other game performance values may be clearly indicated. For example, at least one winning opening such as the number of lottery per unit big, base, consecutive character ratio, character ratio, etc., depending on the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display unit 37a, the flashing pattern of the numerical value, etc. You may make it clearly show the appearance performance based on. In this case, it is conceivable to rank the other appearance performances into a plurality of ranks (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 38) and to clearly indicate the ranks. In this manner, as an index indicating the ball performance, in addition to the game set value, the ball performance other than the game set value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, so that the game ball 99 to the special out ball outlet 363 is displayed. When a specific condition such as entering a ball is satisfied, in addition to the game set value, it is possible to estimate or grasp other play performances. Thereby, game nature improves and the motivation to continue playing a game can be given.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a controlled by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 has been described, but the game setting value is displayed on the display by the sound lamp control device 5. Also good. As the display in this case, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, or the like can be adopted. And it is also conceivable to display the game setting value step by step or at a stroke on the display that satisfies the specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game setting value, a part or all of the performance information indicating other performance information, for example, the performance performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316, is displayed on the special main display unit 37a. It may be. By displaying the performance information indicating the ball performance based on the winning mouths 313 to 316 on the special main display unit 37a, the player can play between the gaming machines due to individual differences or aging of the gaming machine 10, for example. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning ports 313 to 316. Thereby, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316, and if the player can grasp the ball performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316, the game during the game is based on the performance information. An opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the machine 10 is given.

  Here, the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 includes unit lottery lottery number information, base information, continuous character ratio information, and character ratio information.

  The number of lottery per unit is an index that indicates the ease of receiving a big lottery in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). By displaying on the display unit 37a, it becomes possible to know the easiness of receiving the big hit lottery. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of lottery per unit lottery, and if the number of lottery per unit jackpot can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the number of lottery per unit jackpot An opportunity is given.

  Since the base information is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize to the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, a part or all of the base information is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, so that the first information is displayed. It becomes possible to know the ease of winning a prize to the prize winning opening 314 and the general winning prize opening 313. Thus, the player is given an opportunity to guess and enjoy the base, and when the base can be grasped, an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the base.

  The continuous winnings ratio information includes the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state), and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening 316 (in the special gaming state) It is an index that shows the amount of balls that appear. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. Thus, it becomes possible to know the frequency of occurrence and the ease of winning a prize to the variable prize opening 316. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

  The bonus rate information includes the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state (stay rate in the jackpot game state), the stay rate in the high frequency support mode that receives support from the electric bonus 315b, and variable This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize to the winning prize opening 316 and the second winning prize opening 315 (the payout rate in the big hit gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to know the frequency, the stay ratio of the high-frequency support mode that receives the support of the electric accessory 315b, and the ease of winning a prize to the variable prize winning opening 316 and the second winning prize opening 315. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, and the game setting value can be visually recognized by the downward movement of the staying box 39 disposed on the front side of the special main display portion 37a. Explained the case.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a translucent monitor is disposed on the front side of the special main display unit on which the game setting value is displayed, and the game setting value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor. This is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that the visibility is changed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the clown device of the gaming machine and its surroundings according to the present embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the display part 37a and translucent monitor 39A.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the croon device 36, the discharge port 319, the right side of the symbol display unit 341 in the gaming board 31, as in the fifth embodiment described above. In addition, a special main display unit 37a is provided. However, in this embodiment, the staying box 39 in the above-described fifth embodiment is not provided, and instead of this staying box 39, a translucent monitor 39A (a translucent display device) is provided. Yes.

  The cruising device 36 has the same configuration as that of the cruising device 36 of the fifth embodiment described above, but a guide member 370 is connected to the special out ball passage 364. The guide member 370 guides the game ball 99 introduced into the special out ball passage 364 to the back side of the game board 31, and is also connected to the discharge port 319.

  The translucent monitor 39A has a low transmittance state (light shielding state) in which the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is low and the back side is invisible or difficult to see, and the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is high and the back side is visually recognized. It is possible to change the visible light transmittance between possible high transmittance states (transparent states). The translucent monitor 39A is in a light shielding state by displaying a single color such as black or white. Further, the translucent monitor 39A can realize a translucent state that is a plurality of intermediate visible light transmittances between the light shielding state and the transparent state. The translucent monitor 39A is, for example, a transparent flat display such as an organic EL display or a liquid crystal display that can realize a transparent state. By adjusting the applied voltage to the monitor electrode, the presence / absence of voltage application to each dot, the entire monitor It is possible to change the visible light transmittance at. And as shown to FIG. 81 (A), the translucent monitor 39A is fixedly arrange | positioned in the front of the special main display part 37a. Therefore, by selecting the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A, the display content of the special main display unit 37a can be selected from a state where it is invisible or difficult to view, and a state where it is visible, It is possible to adjust the degree of visibility (viewing level) in a visible state.

  Here, FIG. 81B is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A and the visual recognition state of the special main display unit 37a. The visual recognition level is an index indicating the visibility behind the translucent monitor 39A, and correlates with the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is five levels of 0-4. Moreover, the higher the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A (the larger the visual recognition level number), the higher the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A and the higher the visibility of the special main display portion 37a. At the visual recognition level 0, since the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the back of the translucent monitor 39A cannot be viewed, the display content on the special main display portion 37a cannot be confirmed at all. On the other hand, at the visual recognition level 4, since the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, the display content on the special main display portion 37a can be confirmed without any problem. .

  Here, FIG. 81C is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out-ball count number and the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor. Note that the special out ball count is the count of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36. This special out ball count is counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a, but is cleared to 0 when the count reaches 4.

  As shown in FIG. 81C, the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is determined according to the number of special out balls counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a. Specifically, the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 0 when the number of special out-ball counts is 0, and the back of the translucent monitor 39A is invisible or difficult to see, and the special out-ball count is 1 for 1 and 2 for 2 special out ball counts, 3 for 3 special out ball counts, and 4 for special out ball counts The number 4 is completely visible behind the translucent monitor 39A.

  In addition, when the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A becomes 4 in which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, it does not wait for the next game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 363, and the visual recognition is performed. After a certain time after the level becomes 4, the back of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 0, which is invisible or difficult to view.

  Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 when changing the visual recognition level (visible light transmittance) of the translucent monitor 39A will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) are performed in the same manner as the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) of the fifth embodiment described above. A counter update process (step S2003), a command determination process (step S3701), a variable game effect process (step S2005), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process of the present embodiment (step S3301) differs from the command determination process of the fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 31) in some steps. Further, in the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, a shading control process is executed instead of the staying box return process of the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) of the fifth embodiment described above (step S3702). ).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If it is neither of these (No in steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S3801). The special out ball detection command is a command that is set when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 35a that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball outlet 363, and step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process.

  If the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3801: YES), the MPU 51 executes a visual control process (step S3802).

[Visual control processing]
In the visual control process, a process of controlling the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is executed so as to achieve a visual recognition level (see FIG. 81C) corresponding to the special out-ball count number. Here, FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the visual control process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
As shown in FIG. 84, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter (step S3901), and the visibility of the translucent monitor 39A is determined according to the visual recognition level corresponding to the value of the special out ball counter after the addition. The light transmittance is controlled (step S3902). That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual recognition level one level higher than the visual recognition level before receiving the special out ball detection command by controlling the voltage value applied to the translucent monitor 39A. (See FIG. 81B).

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the special out ball counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is the maximum transparency that allows the back of the translucent monitor 39A to be completely visible. When the value of the visual recognition level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3904. When the visual recognition level counter is not 4 (step S3903: No), the MPU 51 ends the visual control processing. To do.

<Step S3904>
When the value of the visual recognition level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the light shielding start counter to a predetermined value (step S3904). Here, the light shielding start counter is completely invisible behind the translucent monitor 39A from the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual recognition level 4 (transparent state) where the back of the translucent monitor 39A can be completely visually recognized. This is a counter for determining the timing of changing to the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual recognition level 0 (light shielding state) that is difficult to visually recognize, and is referred to in step S4003 in the light shielding control processing of FIG. Note that the value of the light shielding start counter is set to a value corresponding to a certain time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4 to when it is returned to the visibility level 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 sets the light shielding start standby flag to ON, and ends the visual control process. Here, the light shielding start standby flag is a flag indicating that the light-transmitting monitor 39A is on standby for changing the visual recognition level to 0, and is referred to in step S4001 in the light-shielding process of FIG. 85 described later. The

[Shading control processing]
In the light shielding control process, a process of setting the visual recognition level to 0 after a certain time has elapsed after the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4. Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the light shielding control process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 85, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the light-shielding start standby flag that is set to ON in step S3905 in the visual control process of FIG. 84 described later is set to ON. When the light shielding start standby flag is set to on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4002, and when the light shielding start standby flag is set to off (step S4001: No), The staying box return processing is terminated.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the light shielding start standby flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the light shielding start counter set in step S3904 in the visual control process of FIG. 84 (step S4002). It is determined whether or not the value of the shading start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain time has elapsed since the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A was set to 4. When the value of the shading start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4004, and when the value of the shading start counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4003: No). The shading control process ends.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
When the value of the light shielding start counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 controls the light transmitting monitor 39A in the light shielding state by controlling the level of the voltage value applied to the light transmitting monitor 39A. The visible light transmittance corresponding to a certain visual recognition level 0 is set (step S4004). Thereby, since the time during which the entire special main display unit 37a is completely visually recognized is restricted to a certain time, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left for a long time in a state where it can be visually recognized. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the special out ball counter to 0 (step S4005), sets the light shielding start standby flag to off (step S4006), and ends the staying box return process.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when the right hit such as a big hit game is made, the game ball 99 is gradually entered by entering the special out ball opening 363 of the croon device 36 which is difficult to enter. The staying box 39 moves down, and the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be gradually confirmed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment, instead of the staying box 39 in the fifth embodiment described above, a translucent monitor 39A is provided on the front side of the special main display portion on which the game setting value is displayed. Is arranged, and the visibility of the game setting value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A. Further, the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A is stepped by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 of the croon device 36 which is difficult to enter when hitting right such as a big hit game. To be changed. Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 in the cruising device 36 enters the special out ball outlet 363 when the player hits the right game such as a big hit game. . In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball outlet 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear, so that the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. Thereby, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the visual recognition level is adjusted by adjusting the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A, but according to the display color of each segment on the special main display unit 37a, It is also conceivable to adjust the visual recognition level by adjusting the display color of the entire translucent monitor 39A.

  It is also conceivable to adjust the visual recognition level step by step between the light shielding state and the transparent state by partially changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (D), a transparent region having a high visible light transmittance is staged from a state where the visible light transmittance of the entire light-transmitting monitor 39A is low (light-shielding state). It is also possible to increase the intensity of the light-transmitting monitor 39A and finally make the entire light-transmitting monitor 39A transparent.

Note that the example of FIG. 86A is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the upper side to the lower side of the translucent monitor 39A, and the example of FIG. 86B is the example of FIG. Contrary to the pattern, the transparent area gradually increases from the lower side to the upper side of the translucent monitor 39A. In addition, the example of FIG. 86C is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the right side to the left side of the translucent monitor 39A. A pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the left side toward the right side is also conceivable. In addition, the example of FIG. 86D is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the upper left corner side of the translucent monitor 39A toward the lower right corner side on the diagonal side, which is not illustrated. A pattern in which the transparent area gradually increases from the other corner side of the translucent monitor 39A toward the diagonal corner side is also conceivable.
In this way, even when the transparent area is gradually increased by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball outlet 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear. In the process, the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed. Thereby, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be grasped can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, it is possible to change the visual recognition level between the light shielding state and the transparent state by increasing the visible light transmittance as a whole while giving gradation to the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A. Conceivable.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of areas that are set in advance each time a specific condition is satisfied while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state may be set as transparent areas in a predetermined order. Conceivable. For example, as shown in FIG. 87A, the plurality of areas may be set in portions corresponding to the segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a. Specifically, the central portion of each segment A to G is set as a region A to region G that can be a transparent region, and each of the regions A to G is transparent each time a specific condition is satisfied. It may be possible to determine whether or not each segment is lit by making it an area. Here, FIG. 87 (B) shows an example in which the regions A to G are changed to transparent regions in this order each time a specific condition is satisfied. As described above, by changing the areas A to G to the transmission area while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state, it is possible to estimate the game setting value step by step.

  Note that the order in which the areas A to G are set as the transparent areas is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 87B, and may be set as appropriate. For example, it may be determined according to the game setting value, or the game setting value. May be determined according to other elements (for example, the performance of the base other than the game setting value) or may be determined by lottery. Moreover, when a specific condition is satisfied, not only one area among the areas A to G but two or more areas may be transparent areas. Further, it is not necessary that all of the regions A to G be transmissive regions while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light-shielding state to the transparent state, and some regions may be sequentially made transmissive regions. In this case, the order of setting the partial areas as the transparent areas may be appropriately determined according to the game setting value and the like, as in the case described above. Further, the plurality of areas are not limited to the areas A to G corresponding to the segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a, but may be set on the front side of the portions other than the segments A to G. In this case, the number of stages until the game setting value can be grasped can be increased, and when a specific condition is satisfied, it can be enjoyed which of the areas A to G and the other areas is a transparent area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the translucent monitor 39A is gradually changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state, but may be changed at once from the light shielding state to the transparent state.

  Also in the present embodiment, the number of unit big hits, base, consecutive character ratio, character ratio, etc., depending on the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display portion 37a, the flashing pattern of the numerical value, etc. You may make it clearly show the performance of a ball based on at least one winning opening.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, and the game setting value is not visible when the staying box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a is at the upper limit position. Alternatively, the case has been described in which it is difficult and part or all of the game setting values can be visually recognized by moving the staying box 39 stepwise from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. In the fifth embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the stay box 39 is returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the downward movement of the stay box 39 is started.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a drive abnormality occurs in the stay box arranged on the front side of the special main display unit when the stay box is checked after the main power is turned on and the stay box is driven during the jackpot game. This is different from the fifth embodiment described above in that abnormality processing is executed when a drive abnormality has occurred.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 88 is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X5-X5 in FIG. 88, and FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view of a region including a staying box and a special main display portion in the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same basic configuration as that of the fifth embodiment described above, but enters the special out ball opening 363 of the cruising device 36. The game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying in the stay box 39. For this reason, it is undesirable for the game ball 99 to stay in the stay box 39, for example, a failure of the motor 39a for driving the stay box 39, a drive mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 39a to the stay box 39, or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from staying in the staying box 39 in a situation where the staying box 39 may not be lowered to the lowering level 4 due to a failure. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from overflowing from the stay box 39 or the game ball 99 from staying in the special out ball passage 364.

  The gaming machine 10 includes a forced discharge member 319B, an upper limit position detection sensor 40A, a lower limit position detection sensor 40B, and a translucent monitor 39A. Further, a notch 319A is provided on the back side of the lower end portion of the special out ball passage 364 of the croon device 36, and a forced discharge port 319C is provided above the special main display portion 37a in the game board 31. The cutout 319 </ b> A and the forced discharge port 319 </ b> C define a space for discharging the special out ball passage 364 of the clune device 36 to the game board 31. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, a discharge path 319 </ b> D is provided that guides the game ball 99 that has passed through the forced discharge port 319 </ b> C to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35.

  The forced discharge member 319B can be moved in the front-rear direction D1 between a standby position (see FIG. 89) and an operating position (see FIG. 90) by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. As shown in FIG. 89, at the standby position, the forced discharge member 319B does not exist between the special out ball passage 364 and the staying box 39, but enters the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36 and enters the special out ball. A game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the passage 364 can enter the stay box 39. Normally, the forced discharge member 319B is in the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, in the operating position, a forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the staying box 39, and a game ball 99 (special out ball is discharged from the special out ball passage 364. ) Can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 and the special out balls are restricted from entering the staying box 39. The forced discharge member 319B is moved to the operating position when there is a drive abnormality of the staying box 39. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the staying box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C.

  The forced discharge member 319B is not limited to a configuration that can move in the front-rear direction D1, and other configurations can be employed. For example, the forced discharge member 319B is movable between a closed position where the forced discharge port 319C is closed and a closed position where the forced discharge port 319C is opened. When the forced discharge member 319B is in the open position, the special out ball A configuration that exists between the passage 364 and the staying box 39 is also conceivable.

  The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are used to detect the position of the staying box 39. The upper limit position detection sensor 40 </ b> A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40 </ b> B are optical sensors such as a reflection type sensor and an illuminance sensor, and are connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. Therefore, the outputs of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B can be monitored by the MPU 51. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B may be connected to the input / output I / F 42 of the main controller 4. In this case, the command according to the output from the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, so that the position of the staying box 39 in the sound lamp control device 5 is determined. Is grasped.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (C), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is provided above the special main display portion 37a, and when the stay box 39 is at the lower movement level 0, The presence can be detected, and the presence of the staying box 39 cannot be detected when the staying box 39 is at the lower movement level 1 to 4. On the other hand, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is provided below the discharge port 319 and can detect the presence of the staying box 39 when the staying box 39 is at the lower movement level 4, and the staying box 39 is at the lowering movement levels 0 to 3. In some cases, the presence of the staying box 39 cannot be detected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A outputs a high level signal (H) in the case of a downward movement level 0 when operating normally. A low level signal (L) is output in the case of lower movement levels 1 to 4. When the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is operating normally, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B outputs a high level signal (H) in the case of the downward movement level 4, while the low level signal ( L) is output. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92B, when the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally, the output levels of the signals output from these detection sensors 40A, 40B The combination is HL at the lower movement level 0, LL at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, and LH at the lower movement level 4.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the translucent monitor 39A is arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a and controls the visibility of numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display unit 37a. To do. The translucent monitor 39A is the same as the translucent monitor 39A of the sixth embodiment described above, and the visible light transmittance is changed by being controlled by the MPU 51. Thereby, the special main display unit 37a has a state in which the visible light transmittance is high on the translucent monitor 39A and the display content is visible, and the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A is low and the display content is invisible. Or visibility is controlled between difficult states. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92C, the translucent monitor 39A is in a normal state in which the display content on the special main display portion 37a is visible when the staying box 39 is driven normally. When the drive abnormality has occurred in the staying box 39, the display content on the special main display unit 37a is in a visually restricted state that is invisible or difficult to view.

  Here, the case where the dwelling box 39 is not driven normally means that the downward movement level grasped by the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level grasped by the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. It means there is a difference between them. For example, if the stay box 39 is not moved up and down due to a malfunction of the motor 39a or the drive mechanism, the stay box 39 is moved up and down, but the value of the down movement level counter is different from the detection sensors 40A and 40B. This corresponds to the case where the staying box 39 is not driven normally. In the present embodiment, as will be described below, the operation check of the staying box is performed by the sound lamp control device 5 during the start-up process and the big hit game executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Is executed. In addition to the start-up process and the jackpot game, the operation check of the staying box 39 is not limited to the demonstration display on the symbol display unit 341 or the like after a certain period of time has elapsed since the launch of the game ball 99 in the gaming machine 10 is stopped. If it is being executed, such as when an RTC (real-time clock) effect is being executed on a symbol display diagram 341 or the like at a predetermined time, it is executed at a timing when the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the staying box 39 is moved. May be.

  Instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it may be considered that the number corresponding to the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a by other means is not visible or difficult. For example, the special main display part 37a may be hidden by a movable member different from the stay box 39, the special main display part 37a is configured to be movable, and the special main display part 37a is arranged on the back side of the stay box 39, etc. The special main display part 37a may be retracted to a position where it cannot be visually recognized or difficult by moving. It is also conceivable that the game setting value cannot be grasped by turning off the power of the special main display unit 37a. In addition, instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it may be possible to make the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult by optical action. For example, an optical member such as a light guide member or a diffusing member is disposed on the front side of the special main display portion 37a, and light from a light source is input to the optical member, thereby making the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult. It is also possible. On the contrary, the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized by turning on the light source and injecting light from the light source into the optical member, while the special main display unit 37a cannot be viewed by turning off the light source. Or it may be difficult.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. The processing in the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is basically the same as that in the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, processing for checking the drive state of the staying box 39 is executed. Specifically, for example, when the main box of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the staying box operation check process is executed in the start-up process that is executed, and when the staying box 39 is moved down in the staying box lowering process, and When the stay box 39 is moved up in the stay box return process, an operation check is performed to check whether the drive state of the stay box 39 is normal.

[Restoration box operation check processing]
In the stay box operation check process, whether or not the stay box 39 is operating normally is determined on the condition that the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally. This is checked using the position detection sensor 40B. That is, the staying box operation check process is executed after checking the operation of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B for abnormality. For the operation check of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, for example, a light source for operation check arranged in the vicinity of each of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is blinked, or a movable body Is performed based on the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at that time. Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box operation check process executed in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 93, the MPU 51 moves the staying box 39 to the lower movement level 4 (lower limit position) (step S4101), and after a predetermined time has passed (step S4102: Yes), returns the staying box 39 to the upper limit position. (Step S4103). Here, the reason why the stay box 39 is moved to the lower limit position and returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time is that the game ball 99 may remain in the stay box 39 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Because there is sex. In other words, for example, when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off during the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0 to 3 while the game ball 99 is staying in the staying box 39. is there. Therefore, by moving the staying box 39 to the lower limit position and returning it to the upper limit position after a predetermined time, it is possible to achieve a state in which the game ball 99 does not exist inside the staying box 39 and lower the staying box 39 to the lower movement level 0. It is possible to wait at the upper limit position. Further, the predetermined time for stopping the stay box 39 at the lower limit position at the lower movement level 4 is set to a time required for discharging the game ball 99 stayed in the stay box 39, for example, about 2 to 10 seconds. is there.

  When the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 to the downward movement level 0 (step S4103), the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S4104), and the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. And the combination of the output levels of these detection sensors 40A and 40B is stored for the downward movement level 0 (step S4105).

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
Next, the MPU 51 moves the stay box 39 stepwise from the lower movement level 1 to 4 until the stay box 39 is moved down to the lower movement level 4 (step S4109: Yes) (step S4106). Each time is moved down, 1 is added to the value of the down movement level counter (step S4107), and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at each down movement level is stored (step S4108).

<Steps S4110 to S4116>
The MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement level counter is all 0 to 4 and the combination of the output levels is a combination when the staying box 39 is operating normally (see FIG. 92B). (Steps S4110 to 4114). When the values of the down movement level counter are all 0 to 4 and the combinations of the output levels are operating normally (Yes in all of steps S4110 to 4114), the staying box 39 Therefore, the staying box 39 is returned to the upper limit position where the lowering level is 0 (step S4115), the value of the lowering level counter is set to 0 (step S4116), The box operation check process ends.

  On the other hand, the MPU 51 does not correspond to the combination when the output level combination at which the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is operating normally (No in any of steps S4110 to 4114). ) Since it can be determined that the drive state of the staying box 39 is abnormal, an error process is executed (step S4117), and the staying box operation check process is terminated. Here, the cause of the abnormality in the drive state of the stay box 39 is, for example, an abnormality in the motor 39a or the drive system for moving the stay box 39 up and down, or in the case where the motor 39a or the drive system is normal. A mismatch between the value of the dynamic level counter and the downward movement level detected by the detection sensors 40A and 40B can be considered. The error processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[Error handling]
In the error process, an abnormality process according to the abnormal state of the drive state of the staying box 39 is executed. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the error processing procedure executed in the staying box operation check process of FIG.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in all the values of the down movement level counters 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LH regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 detects the detection sensor regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in all of the downward movement level counter values 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201: Yes). Since the combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always LH, and it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position at the lower movement level 4 and does not move, the first drive in step S4202 Shift processing to abnormal processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LH when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
The MPU 51 executes the first drive abnormality process when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in all the values of the down movement level counters 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201: Yes) (step S4202). Then, the error processing is finished. Here, when the drive abnormality that the stationary box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position at the lower movement level 4 and does not move has occurred, the display content of the special main display portion 37a is always visible. Therefore, in the first drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 displays the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a from the normal state where the display content on the special main display unit 37a is visible. The display content on the part 37a is switched to a visually restricted state where the visibility is difficult or difficult (see FIG. 92C). As a result, even if the staying box 39 does not move from the lower limit position, which is the lower movement level 4, the display content (game setting value) on the special main display portion 37a is not visible or difficult. Therefore, when the staying box 39 stops moving at the lower limit position that is the lower movement level 4, the special main display portion is displayed even though the game ball 99 has not entered the special out mouth 363 of the cruising device 36. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the game setting value because the display content at 37a is always visible.

  In addition, the MPU 51 may notify that the staying box 39 does not move in the first drive abnormality process. In this case, for example, an image indicating that the drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and a sound indicating that the drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred is output from the speaker 26. Thus, it may be possible to notify that a drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred. Thereby, the game hall side can know that the drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has generate | occur | produced.

  Further, on the condition that there is no abnormality in other elements other than the staying box 39, the game hall side selects whether to shift to a waiting state where a player can play a game or to disable a game by a player. It is also possible to do so. For example, in addition to the image indicating that the drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image for selecting whether or not to shift to the waiting state for the customer, such as the upper plate 23. It may be possible to select whether or not to shift to a customer waiting state on the game hall side by using an operation button 20 or a cross key (not shown). Thereby, when there is no abnormality other than the drive abnormality of the staying box 39 and there is no problem in executing the game, it may be left to the game hall side whether or not the game machine 10 is used by the player. It becomes possible.

  Then, when the game hall side selects the waiting state for the customer, the technique of the sixth embodiment is applied, and the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36 (the number of special out balls) is increased. Accordingly, the visibility of the display content of the special main display section 37a may be changed by selecting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. For example, a special main display unit is provided by providing a sensor for detecting a game ball 99 such as a proximity sensor in the vicinity of the forced discharge port 319C and changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A based on the output of the sensor. The visibility of 37a may be changed. In this case, even when the staying box 39 stops moving at the lower limit position that is the lower movement level 4, it is possible to give the gaming machine 10 a gameability that allows the game setting value to be estimated or recognized. In addition, in the case where the number corresponding to the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a by other means is made invisible or difficult in place of the translucent monitor 39A, the special means is also used by the other means. You may make it change the visibility of the main display part 37a.

<Step S4203>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LH when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 determines that all of the values of the downward movement level counter are 0 to 4. It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at HL is HL (step S4203). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always HL regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 detects the detection sensor regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in all of the downward movement level counter values of 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes). Since the combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always HL, and it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position where the lower movement level is 0 and does not move, the second drive in step S4204 Shift processing to abnormal processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in all the values of the down movement level counters 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality process (step S4204). Then, the error processing is finished. Here, when a drive abnormality has occurred in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position where the lowering level is 0 and does not move, the game ball 99 of the staying box 39 is introduced when the game ball 99 is introduced into the staying box 39. Can not be discharged. Therefore, in the second drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 moves the forced discharge member 319B from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). Thereby, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the staying box 39. Therefore, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D in the jackpot game is restricted from entering the staying box 39 by the forced discharge member 319B. Is done. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the staying box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the forced discharge member 319B, the forced discharge port 319C, and the discharge path 319D. . As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 363 is prevented from entering the stay box 39. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 exceeding the capacity from staying in the stay box 39, and to prevent the game balls 99 from overflowing from the stay box 39, and to the special out ball passage 364 of the clune device 36. It can prevent clogging. For this reason, even when a drive abnormality has occurred in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position where the lower movement level is 0 and does not move, a game can be executed as usual in the gaming machine 10.

  In the second drive abnormality process, it may be notified that the staying box 39 does not move, as in the case of the first drive process. In this case as well, as in the case of the first driving process, it may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side.

<Step S4205>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LH or HL when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 (both No in steps S4201 and S4203), the downward movement level is 0 to 4 at all. It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL (step S4205). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LL regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the detection sensors 40A and 40B regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. Since the combination of outputs is always LL, and it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred in which the staying box 39 is fixed and does not move at a position corresponding to any of the lower movement levels 1 to 3, the third in step S4206. The process shifts to the drive abnormality process. On the other hand, if the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LL at any of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 detects the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter, and the detection sensor. Since it is determined that a link abnormality that differs from the downward movement level based on 40A and 40B has occurred, the process proceeds to the link abnormality process in step S4207.

<Step S4206>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B with the value of the downward movement level counter being 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process (step S4206). ), The error processing is terminated. Here, in the case where there is a drive abnormality in which the staying box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any one of the lower movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, a part of the display content of the special main display unit 37a is always visible. In addition, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the stay box 39, the game ball 99 in the stay box 39 cannot be discharged. Therefore, in the third drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 executes the same process as the second drive abnormality process in addition to the same process as the first drive abnormality process. Specifically, the MPU 51 changes the translucent monitor 39A disposed on the front side of the special main display unit 37a from the normal state where the display content on the special main display unit 37a is visible to the special main display unit 37a. While the display content is switched to a visually restricted state where the display content is invisible or difficult (see FIG. 92C), the forced discharge member 319B is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, even if the staying box 39 does not move at any one of the lower movement levels 1 to 3, the display content (game setting value) on the special main display portion 37a is not visible or difficult. Further, in the big hit game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball outlet 363 of the croon device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 and is stored in the staying box 39. It is possible to prevent the game ball from staying.

<Step S4207>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B with the value of the downward movement level counter being 0 to 4 is not LH, HL, or LL (No in all of steps S4201, S4203, and S4205), the MPU 51 indicates a link error. The process is executed (step S4207), and the error process is terminated. Here, if a link abnormality occurs between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B (except when the staying box 39 does not move), the staying The box 39 cannot be operated normally. Therefore, in the link abnormality process, the MPU 51 moves the staying box 39 to the position of the downward movement level based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. For example, when the combination of the output levels from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL, the staying box 39 is moved to the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0. In addition, when the process of matching the link between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is executed, the staying box operation check process is executed again. It is preferable to check whether the link is consistent. If it is determined that the link is not consistent even after the stay box operation check process is performed again, there is a possibility that the stay box 39 cannot move to a part of the downward movement level. You may make it alert | report that it does not cancel. Also in this case, it may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side. Further, when the link abnormality is not resolved, the third drive abnormality process may be executed.

  By the way, when the visibility of the special main display unit 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the stay box 39, it is assumed that the drive error of the stay box 39 occurs due to, for example, the motor 39a connected to the stay box 39 or the drive system. Is done. In this case, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0, the game ball inside the staying box 39 cannot be discharged. When the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 4, the entire special main display portion 37a remains visible, so that the game setting value is grasped. When the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, not only a part of the special main display part 37 a remains visible, but the game balls inside the staying box 39 cannot be discharged. .

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, an operation check process is performed to determine whether or not a drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred. And when the drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has generate | occur | produced, the abnormality process according to the position (downward movement level) etc. which the drive of the staying box 39 has stopped is performed. Specifically, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0, the forced discharge member 319B is operated so that the special out ball can be forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31. The game ball 99 is prevented from entering the staying box 39. Further, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 4, the special main display portion 37a is made invisible or difficult by reducing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. When the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, the forced discharge member 319B is operated and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game balls inside the staying box 39 cannot be discharged, and it is possible to prevent all or part of the special main display portion 37a from being visible. As a result, even if a drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred, the game can be executed on the gaming machine 10.

[Still box lowering process]
In the stay box lowering process of the present embodiment, the position corresponding to the lowering level (see FIG. 74C) corresponding to the number of game balls staying in the stay box 39 is the same as in the fifth embodiment described above. A process for lowering the staying box 39 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, before the dwelling box 39 is moved downward, the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B are confirmed, and the alignment is achieved. If not, the third drive abnormality process is executed. Here, FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stay box downward movement process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S4301 to S4304>
As shown in FIG. 95, in the stay box downward movement process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first acquires a combination of output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4301). Then, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), and when the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the error processing described above. The third drive abnormality process to be executed is executed (step S4303). In addition, when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), that is, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 1 to 3, the MPU 51 sets the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B to LL. If not (step S4304: YES), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4303). That is, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process when the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter is not consistent with the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. That is, the reason why the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not consistent is whether the staying box does not move or is simply aligned. If the staying box 39 is not moving, it is impossible to determine at which lower movement level the staying box 39 is stopped, so that the third drive can cope with any drive abnormality. Abnormal processing is executed.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter matches the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is limited to before the staying box 39 is moved downward. Instead, it may be performed after the staying box 39 is moved down, or may be performed both before and after the staying box 39 is moved down.

[Restoration processing for staying box]
In the stay box return process of the present embodiment, a process of returning the stay box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) after a lapse of a certain period of time after the staying box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4) is executed. Is done. In the present embodiment, matching between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B is confirmed before and after the retention box 39 is restored. The third drive abnormality process is executed when the image is not removed. Here, FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Steps S4401 to S4404>
As shown in FIG. 96, in the stay box return process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 is at the return timing of the stay box 39 (Yes in steps S3601 and S3603), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. A combination of output levels is acquired (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH (step S4402). That is, immediately before the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 from the lower movement level 4 to the lower movement level 0, the MPU 51 lowers based on the combination of the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. Judgment is consistent with the dynamic level. Further, when the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 to the downward movement level 0 (step S3604), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL (step S4403). Then, the MPU 51 moves down based on the combination of the down movement level based on the value of the down movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B immediately after the stay box 39 is returned or immediately after the stay box 39 is returned. If the level does not match (No in step S4402 or S4403), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4304).

  Note that whether or not the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter is consistent with the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is to return (upward) the staying box 39. It is not limited to both before and after, and may be performed only before or after the staying box 39 is returned.

  As described above, when the visibility of the special main display unit 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the stay box 39, for example, a drive abnormality of the stay box 39 occurs due to an abnormality in the motor 39a connected to the stay box 39 or the drive system. It is assumed that In the present embodiment, whether or not there is a drive abnormality in the staying box 39 is determined by an operation check that is performed after the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Even if it is determined that there is no drive abnormality in this operation check, it is assumed that a drive abnormality occurs in the staying box 39 during the game.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when the stay box 39 is moved down during the game and when the stay box 39 is returned (up), it is determined whether there is a drive abnormality in the stay box 39, and there is a drive abnormality. In this case, a drive abnormality process is executed. Thereby, even if a drive abnormality occurs in the staying box 39 during the game, the game can be continued. In particular, since the stay box 39 is moved up and down in the jackpot game, it is significant that the game can be continued when the stay box 39 is abnormally driven.

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the fifth embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. It is not a thing. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
A performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
A performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
Visual state control means for controlling the visual restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and enabling visual recognition of at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). 51),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to guess and enjoy the appearance performance of the gaming machine being played based on the visible part. Further, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to grasp the play performance of the gaming machine being played. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or grasp the play performance of the gaming machine during the game, so that the game performance is improved, and the motivation to continue the game can be given.

[Appendix A2]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine. In addition, when a part or all of the information related to the advantage determination probability is displayed on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability Based on the above, an opportunity to determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine is given.

[Appendix A3]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of game balls;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or appendix A2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3 includes performance information indicating the performance of a ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports. Therefore, the player can display part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make individual differences or change over time when the gaming machine is manufactured. It is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the ball reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning mouth, and if the ball performance based on the winning mouth can be grasped, the game can be continued on the gaming machine based on the performance information. An opportunity to decide whether to do so is given.

[Appendix A4]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
Entering the game ball into the first winning opening (314) until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or until the number of game balls fired on the game board (31) reaches the specific ball number Unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the unit determination number of times that the transfer determination is performed by the shift determination means (41) triggered by a sphere,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the performance information includes performance information related to the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations by displaying part or all of the information about the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the ease of transfer determination. Become. Thereby, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game in the gaming machine based on the unit determination number when the unit determination number can be grasped and enjoyed by guessing the unit determination number. Is granted.

[Appendix A5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The number of game balls paid out to the first winning port (314) and the number of game balls discharged to the first winning port (313) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) with respect to the number of game balls launched to the game board (31) And further comprising a payout rate calculating means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the performance information includes information related to the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate by displaying part or all of the performance information related to the payout rate, so that the player can win the first winning entry and the general winning entry. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the appearance rate when he / she can estimate the appearance rate and enjoy it. Is granted.

[Appendix A6]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), And further comprising a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of payout balls.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, and the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (the ratio of staying in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable prize opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

[Appendix A7]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls into the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), with respect to the entrance of game balls into the variable winning port (316) An accessory ratio calculating means (41) for calculating an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls between the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the game balls entering the second winning opening (315); ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). For this reason, the player can estimate or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay rate in special gaming state), stay rate in support gaming state (short-time gaming state) that receives support from motorized equipment, and ease of winning a prize in the variable winning slot and second winning slot (outing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the cypress rate. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

[Appendix A8]
The visual restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on the performance information display means (37a) and a first position (upper limit position) that is not visible or difficult to visually recognize. Is movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information is visible,
The visual state control means (51) moves the visual restriction means (39) in a predetermined direction (downward) from the first position toward the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A7, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, a state where a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be realized by a simple method of moving the visual restriction means in a predetermined direction.

[Appendix A9]
The visual restriction means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times,
The visual recognition state control means (51) is configured to display the visual restriction means (39) each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visual restriction means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. ) Is moved stepwise in the predetermined direction, according to appendix A8.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, since the visual restriction means is moved stepwise in a predetermined direction every time a specific condition is satisfied, the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually expanded. The As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes clear, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. Thereby, the motivation of continuing a game until performance information can be grasped | ascertained can be improved, and the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix A10]
The visual state control means (51) sets the visual restriction means (39) to at least one intermediate position set between the first position and the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. Can be stopped,
In the intermediate position, a part of the performance information can be visually recognized, and two or more of a plurality of contents (for example, game setting values 1 to 6) set as the same type of performance information (for example, game setting values) The gaming machine according to appendix A9, characterized in that it is set at a position (for example, an intermediate position at the lower movement level 1) where the contents (for example, gaming set values 2, 3, 5, and 6) cannot be distinguished or difficult.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, when the visual restriction means is moved in a predetermined direction when a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the performance information becomes visible, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish two or more contents. It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to narrow down and estimate from a plurality of contents before the contents of performance information can be recognized by satisfying a specific condition. As a result, the player can estimate performance information in stages and improve the estimation accuracy in stages by satisfying a specific condition multiple times. You can enjoy the process.

[Appendix A11]
The game according to appendix A8, wherein the visual state control means (51) moves the visual restriction means (39) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A11, when the specific condition is satisfied, the visual restriction means is moved from the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize to the second position where the entire performance information is visible. . Therefore, since the game property that performance information can be visually recognized immediately when a specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A12]
The visual state control means (51) moves the visual restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visual restriction means (39) started to move from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A8 to A11, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A12, the visual restriction means is returned to the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the movement from the first position. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the visual restriction means from being present for a long time at a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where the performance information can be estimated or grasped. Thereby, it can suppress that performance information is guessed or grasped | ascertained by the player who is not playing a game.

[Appendix A13]
A game board (31) in which a game area where game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) provided in the gaming area and for which a winning ball is paid out by entering a gaming ball;
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area with respect to at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board; ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the specific condition is that a game ball is inserted into the special outlet (363).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, when the game ball is inserted into the special discharge port, the visual restriction means is moved in a predetermined direction, and the visible area of the performance information is expanded. Therefore, not only the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means but also the game interest can be improved because the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the special outlet.

[Appendix A14]
The visual restriction means (39) is capable of accommodating a game ball that has entered the special discharge port (363), and accommodated when moved to the second position by the visual status control means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the gaming ball can be discharged.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A14, the game ball of the visual restriction means is discharged when the visual restriction means is moved to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls of the visual restriction means from overflowing.

[Appendix A15]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
A distribution device that distributes game balls to either the normal ball entrance (387) that guides the game balls that have entered the variable winning award port (316) to a position where it can enter, or the special discharge port (363) (36) The game machine according to appendix A13 or appendix A14, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, in a special game in which a game ball can be inserted into the variable winning opening, the game balls are distributed to the normal entrance and the special discharge opening by the sorting device. In other words, at least in a special game, it is possible to enter a game ball into a special discharge port that changes the visibility state of performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to guess or grasp performance information in a special game is given, so that it is possible to give pleasure to guess or grasp performance information to a special game where the game tends to progress inorganically.

[Appendix A16]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the shift determination by the shift determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first winning opening (314) can enter a game ball launched into the left area of the game board (31),
The variable winning opening (316) can enter a game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31),
The distribution device (36) distributes the game balls launched to the right region to either the normal entrance (387) or the special discharge port (363), according to appendix A15, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A16, since the game ball fired in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, so-called left-handed must be performed in order to receive the determination to shift to the special game There is. On the other hand, since the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform a so-called right strike in the special game. And the distribution device provided with the special discharge port which can expect the change of the visual recognition state of the performance information due to the entrance of the game ball can distribute the game ball launched to the right area of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, in the game for receiving the determination to shift to the special game, the visual status of the performance information does not change, and the visual status of the performance information can change in the special game. In this way, the visibility state of the performance information can change when a right game such as a special game is made, so the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game for a player who is interested in guessing or grasping the performance information. Motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing can be given.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A13 to appendix A16, wherein the special outlet (363) is difficult to enter compared to the normal entrance (387).

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to appendix A17, wherein the special discharge port (363) is provided above the normal ball entrance (387).

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to appendix A17 or appendix A18, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal entrance (387).

[Appendix A20]
The game according to any one of appendix A17 to appendix A19, wherein the distribution device (36) includes an inhibition unit (365) that inhibits the entry of the game ball into the special discharge port (363). Machine.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the inhibiting means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A17 to Supplementary Note A21, it is difficult to enter the performance ball into the special discharge port as compared to the normal ball entry port, so it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, when the game performance is low, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low, so that the game at the gaming machine 10 is stopped early. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix A22]
The visual recognition restriction means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) by the control by the visual recognition state control means (51). A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, the visibility state of the performance information display means is changed by the visibility restriction means being controlled by the visibility state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visibility state of the performance information.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the visual restriction means (39A) is a translucent display device whose light shielding property can be changed by the control by the visual state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by reducing the light shielding properties of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, a state where a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be realized by a simple method of changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device.

[Appendix A24]
The visual state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is displayed from the first state (viewing level 0) invisible or difficult to view. 37a) to change the visibility state of the performance information to a second state (viewing level 4) where the entire performance information displayed can be visually recognized.
The visible region in the translucent display device (39A) is graded each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visual restriction means (39) is changed from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the gaming machine is enlarged.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, each time a specific condition is satisfied, the transparent area in the translucent display device is expanded in stages, so that the performance information visible area displayed on the performance information display means gradually increases. Enlarged. Thereby, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes gradually clear, it is possible to guess and enjoy the performance information in the process. Thereby, the motivation of continuing a game until performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that allow a part of the performance information to be visually recognized in a predetermined order,
The visibility state control means (51) makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the performance information in one or more of the plurality of regions each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in 1.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the plurality of regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix A27]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting areas,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25 or appendix A26, wherein the plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting areas.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A25 to Supplementary Note A27, each time a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device allows a part of the performance information to be visually recognized in one or more of the plurality of regions. The performance information displayed on the information display means can be gradually recognized. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes clear, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. Thereby, the motivation of continuing a game until performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix A28]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual state control means (51) makes the translucent display device (39A) unable to visually recognize the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). It is characterized in that the entire state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from a first state that is difficult to view (viewing level 0) to a second state (viewing level 4) that is visible. The gaming machine according to appendix A22.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, when a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device is changed from a light-blocking state in which performance information is not visible or difficult to view to a transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible. . Therefore, since the game property that performance information can be visually recognized immediately when a specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A29]
The visual state control means (51) moves the visual restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visual restriction means (39) started to move from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A22 to appendix A28, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, the visual restriction means is returned to the first position where the performance information is not visible or difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement started from the first position. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the visual restriction means from being present for a long time at a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where the performance information can be estimated or grasped. Thereby, it can suppress that performance information is guessed or grasped | ascertained by the player who is not playing a game.

[Appendix A30]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting areas,
The performance information display means (37a) displays the specific performance information according to the emission color or blinking pattern of the plurality of light emitting areas when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A29.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30, the specific performance information can be easily specified by the light emission color or flashing pattern of the light emission capable region of the performance information display means.

[Appendix A31]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, it further comprises a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed (a jackpot game state),
The specific condition is:
The number of times the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number of times;
The result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special gaming state continuously for a predetermined number of times,
The transition determination result with the transition to the special gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times;
The total number of game balls launched into the game area of the game board (31) reaches a certain number, or the total number of game balls launched into the game area of the game board (31) and the plurality of winning holes The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A30, wherein a difference between the total number of balls to be paid out by entering the game balls into (313 to 316) exceeds a predetermined number.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A31, the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player may expect the timing when the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means. It becomes possible. Accordingly, the player can expect the timing when the performance information is displayed and can proceed with the game while looking forward to the arrival of the timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B1]
A game board (31) in which a game area where game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) provided in the gaming area and for which a winning ball is paid out by entering a gaming ball;
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area above at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) and discharging a game ball to the back side of the game board;
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
A performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
A performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
The visual restriction means (39, 39A) is controlled based on the game ball entering the special discharge port (363), and at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is controlled. Visual state control means (51) for enabling visual recognition;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed based on the visible part. Further, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to guess or grasp the performance information, so that game performance is improved, and motivation to continue playing the game can be given.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, at least a part of the performance information can be visually recognized by entering the game ball into the special discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the special outlet, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B2]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine. In addition, when a part or all of the information related to the advantage determination probability is displayed on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability Based on the above, an opportunity to determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine is given.

[Appendix B3]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of game balls;
The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or appendix B2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3 includes performance information indicating the performance of a ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports. Therefore, the player can display part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make individual differences or change over time when the gaming machine is manufactured. It is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the ball reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning mouth, and if the ball performance based on the winning mouth can be grasped, the game can be continued on the gaming machine based on the performance information. An opportunity to decide whether to do so is given.

[Appendix B4]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
Entering the game ball into the first winning opening (314) until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or until the number of game balls fired on the game board (31) reaches the specific ball number Unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the unit determination number of times that the transfer determination is performed by the shift determination means (41) triggered by a sphere,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the unit determination number calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, the performance information includes performance information related to the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations by displaying part or all of the information about the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the ease of transfer determination. Become. Thereby, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game in the gaming machine based on the unit determination number when the unit determination number can be grasped and enjoyed by guessing the unit determination number. Is granted.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The number of game balls paid out to the first winning port (314) and the number of game balls discharged to the first winning port (313) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) with respect to the number of game balls launched to the game board (31) And further comprising a payout rate calculating means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, the performance information includes information related to the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate by displaying part or all of the performance information related to the payout rate, so that the player can win the first winning entry and the general winning entry. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the appearance rate when he / she can estimate the appearance rate and enjoy it. Is granted.

[Appendix B6]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), And further comprising a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of payout balls.
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, and the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (the ratio of staying in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable prize opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls into the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), with respect to the entrance of game balls into the variable winning port (316) An accessory ratio calculating means (41) for calculating an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls between the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the game balls entering the second winning opening (315); ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). For this reason, the player can estimate or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay rate in special gaming state), stay rate in support gaming state (short-time gaming state) that receives support from motorized equipment, and ease of winning a prize in the variable winning slot and second winning slot (outing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the cypress rate. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

[Appendix B8]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
A distribution device (36) for distributing the game balls to either the normal ball entrance (387) for guiding the game balls to a position where the game balls can enter the variable winning port (316) or the special discharge port (363). The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B7, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, in a special game in which a game ball can be inserted into the variable winning opening, the game balls are distributed to the normal entrance and the special discharge opening by the sorting device. In other words, at least in a special game, it is possible to enter a game ball into a special discharge port that changes the visibility state of performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to guess or grasp performance information in a special game is given, so that it is possible to give pleasure to guess or grasp performance information to a special game where the game tends to progress inorganically.

[Appendix B9]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, it further comprises a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed (a jackpot game state),
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the shift determination by the shift determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first winning opening (314) can enter a game ball launched into the left area of the game board (31),
The variable winning opening (316) can enter a game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31),
The distribution device (36) distributes the game balls launched to the right region to either the normal entrance (387) or the special discharge port (363), according to appendix B8, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, since the game ball fired in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, so-called left-handed must be performed in order to receive the determination to shift to the special game There is. On the other hand, since the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform a so-called right strike in the special game. And the distribution device provided with the special discharge port which can expect the change of the visual recognition state of the performance information due to the entrance of the game ball can distribute the game ball launched to the right area of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, in the game for receiving the determination to shift to the special game, the visual status of the performance information does not change, and the visual status of the performance information can change in the special game. In this way, the visibility state of the performance information can change when a right game such as a special game is made, so the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game for a player who is interested in guessing or grasping the performance information. Motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing can be given.

[Appendix B10]
The gaming machine according to appendix B8 or appendix B9, wherein the special outlet (363) is difficult to enter compared to the normal entrance (387).

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to appendix B10, wherein the special outlet (363) is provided above the normal entrance (387).

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to appendix B10 or appendix B11, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal entrance port (387).

[Appendix B13]
The game according to any one of appendix B10 to appendix B12, wherein the distribution device (36) includes an inhibition unit (365) that inhibits a game ball from entering the special discharge port (363). Machine.

[Appendix B14]
The gaming machine according to appendix B13, wherein the inhibiting means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

  In the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes B10 to B14, it is difficult to enter the performance ball into the special outlet, compared to the normal entrance, so it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the advantage determination probability is low, so that it is possible to suppress the game from being stopped at the gaming machine 10 at an early stage.

[Appendix C1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
A performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
A performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
Visual state control means for controlling the visual restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and enabling visual recognition of at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). 51),
With
The gaming machine characterized in that the visual restriction means (39A) changes the visual status of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual status control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to guess and enjoy the appearance performance of the gaming machine being played based on the visible part. Further, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to grasp the play performance of the gaming machine being played. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or grasp the play performance of the gaming machine during the game, so that the game performance is improved, and the motivation to continue the game can be given.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the visibility state of the performance information display means is changed by the visibility restriction means being controlled by the visibility state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visibility state of the performance information.

[Appendix C2]
The visual state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is displayed from the first state (viewing level 0) invisible or difficult to view. 37a) to change the visibility state of the performance information to a second state (viewing level 4) where the entire performance information displayed can be visually recognized.
The visible region in the translucent display device (39A) is graded each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visual restriction means (39) is changed from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the gaming machine is enlarged.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C2, the transparent area of the translucent display device is enlarged step by step each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the performance information displayable area displayed on the performance information display means gradually increases. Enlarged. Thereby, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes gradually clear, it is possible to guess and enjoy the performance information in the process. Thereby, the motivation of continuing a game until performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1 or Supplementary C2, wherein the visual restriction means (39A) is a translucent display device whose light shielding property can be changed by the control by the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by reducing the light shielding properties of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, a state where a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be realized by a simple method of changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device.

[Appendix C4]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that allow a part of the performance information to be visually recognized in a predetermined order,
The visual recognition state control means (51) makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the performance information in one or more of the plurality of regions each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in 1.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the plurality of regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix C6]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting areas,
The gaming machine according to appendix C4 or appendix C5, wherein the plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting areas.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix C4 to appendix C6, each time a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device allows a part of the performance information to be visually recognized in one or more of the plurality of regions. The performance information displayed on the information display means can be gradually recognized. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes clear, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. Thereby, the motivation of continuing a game until performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual state control means (51) makes the translucent display device (39A) unable to visually recognize the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). It is characterized in that the entire state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from a first state that is difficult to view (viewing level 0) to a second state (viewing level 4) that is visible. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, when a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device is changed from a light-blocking state in which performance information is invisible or difficult to view to a transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible. . Therefore, since the game property that performance information can be visually recognized immediately when a specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C8]
The visual state control means (51) moves the visual restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visual restriction means (39) started to move from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C7, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, the visual restriction means is returned to the first position where the performance information is not visible or difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement started from the first position. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the visual restriction means from being present for a long time at a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where the performance information can be estimated or grasped. Thereby, it can suppress that performance information is guessed or grasped | ascertained by the player who is not playing a game.

[Appendix C9]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting areas,
The performance information display means (37a) displays the specific performance information according to a light emission color or a blinking pattern of the plurality of light emitting areas when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C9, the specific performance information can be easily specified by the light emission color or the blinking pattern of the light emission possible area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix C10]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to Appendix C9, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) related to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C10, the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine. In addition, when a part or all of the information related to the advantage determination probability is displayed on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability Based on the above, an opportunity to determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine is given.

[Appendix C11]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of game balls;
The game according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C10, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot of the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316) Machine.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note C11 includes performance information indicating the performance of a ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports. Therefore, the player can display part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make individual differences or change over time when the gaming machine is manufactured. It is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the ball reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning mouth, and if the ball performance based on the winning mouth can be grasped, the game can be continued on the gaming machine based on the performance information. An opportunity to decide whether to do so is given.

[Appendix C12]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
Entering the game ball into the first winning opening (314) until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or until the number of game balls fired on the game board (31) reaches the specific ball number Unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the unit determination number of times that the transfer determination is performed by the shift determination means (41) triggered by a sphere,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information related to the unit determination number calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C12, the performance information includes performance information related to the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations by displaying part or all of the information about the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the ease of transfer determination. Become. Thereby, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game in the gaming machine based on the unit determination number when the unit determination number can be grasped and enjoyed by guessing the unit determination number. Is granted.

[Appendix C13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The number of game balls paid out to the first winning port (314) and the number of game balls discharged to the first winning port (313) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) with respect to the number of game balls launched to the game board (31) And further comprising a payout rate calculating means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information related to the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C13, the performance information includes information regarding the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate by displaying part or all of the performance information related to the payout rate, so that the player can win the first winning entry and the general winning entry. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the appearance rate when he / she can estimate the appearance rate and enjoy it. Is granted.

[Appendix C14]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), And further comprising a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of payout balls.
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C14, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, and the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (the ratio of staying in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable prize opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

[Appendix C15]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls into the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), with respect to the entrance of game balls into the variable winning port (316) An accessory ratio calculating means (41) for calculating an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls between the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the game balls entering the second winning opening (315); ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). For this reason, the player can estimate or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay rate in special gaming state), stay rate in support gaming state (short-time gaming state) that receives support from motorized equipment, and ease of winning a prize in the variable winning slot and second winning slot (outing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the cypress rate. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

[Appendix D1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
A performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
A performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
Visual restriction means (39) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see;
Visual state control means (51) for controlling the visual restriction means (39) when a specific condition is satisfied, and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. When,
An abnormality determining means (51) for determining whether or not the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is the visual recognition state of the target performance information;
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix D2]
When the abnormality determining means (51) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the viewing state of the performance information, the abnormality determining means (51) further includes a corresponding process executing means (51) for executing a response process for the abnormality. A gaming machine according to appendix D2.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note D1 and the supplementary note D2, it is possible to determine whether the visual status of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the visual status of the target performance information. As a result, it is possible to cope with the case where the visibility state of the performance information is different from the intended one.

[Appendix D3]
The visual restriction means (39A) can be changed in visibility by the control by the visual condition control means (51), and the forced visual restriction means (39A) different from the visual restriction means (39),
Forced visual state control means (51) for controlling the visibility in the forced visual restriction means (39A);
Further comprising
The visual restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on the performance information display means (37a) and a first position (upper limit position) that is not visible or difficult to visually recognize. Is movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information is visible,
The abnormality determination means (51) can determine that the visual restriction means (39) is not movable to the second position,
The response processing execution means (51) is configured to display the performance information display means (37a) when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the forced visual restriction means (39A) is controlled so that the performance information is invisible or difficult.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D3, when the performance restriction display means cannot move to the second position where the performance information is not visible or difficult in the performance information display means, the performance information display means performs the performance in the performance information display means. Information can be invisible or difficult. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state where part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from guessing or recognizing performance information because part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means can be visually recognized although the specific condition is not satisfied.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the forced visual restriction means (39A) is capable of changing visible light transmittance by the control by the forced visual state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D4, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the forced visual state control means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the forced visual restriction means (39A) is movable to a position that covers the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the forced visual status control means (51). .

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means to a position covered by the forced visual state control means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D6]
The forced visual restriction means (39A) includes a light source controlled by the forced visual state control means (51) and an optical member that receives light emitted from the light source and can diffuse or guide the incident light. The gaming machine according to appendix D3, comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D6, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by turning on or off the light source. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D7]
The forced visual recognition state control means (51) is configured to perform the compulsory visual recognition state control means (51) when the specific condition is satisfied when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition state of the performance information. According to any one of supplementary notes D3 to D6, wherein the visual restriction means (39A) is controlled so that at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D7, when the visual recognition state of the performance information is abnormal, the compulsory visual restriction means is controlled so that at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized. It is said. In other words, when a drive abnormality of the visual restriction means occurs, the visibility of the performance information is changed by the forced visual restriction means instead of the visual restriction means. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visibility of a performance information cannot be changed by a visual restriction means, the visibility of a performance information can be changed by a forced visual restriction means.

[Appendix D8]
The visual restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on the performance information display means (37a) and a first position (upper limit position) that is not visible or difficult to visually recognize. Is movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information is visible,
The performance information display means (37a) is movable to a position hidden by the visibility restriction means (39) when at least the visibility restriction means (39) is in the second position,
The abnormality determination means (51) can determine that the visual restriction means (39) is not movable to the second position,
The response processing execution means (51) is configured to display the performance information display means (37a) when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position. Is moved to a position hidden by the visual restriction means (39).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D9]
The abnormality determining means (51) includes a detecting means (40A) capable of detecting that the visual restriction means (39A) is in the second position,
The abnormality determining means (51) is controlled by the detecting means (40A) when the visual restriction control means (51) controls the visual restriction means (39) to move to the second position. If it is not detected that (39A) is in the second position, it is determined that the visual restriction means (39) is immovable to the second position. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D9, it can be determined by the detection means whether the visual restriction means cannot be moved to the second position. Thereby, it can be detected whether there is an abnormality in the visual restriction means by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D10]
The abnormality determination means (51) determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means (39) during the period from when the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D9, wherein

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means between the time when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when the game can be started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from being in a state in which a game can be started in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means, it is possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Appendix D11]
The abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means (39) after the start of the game is enabled. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means after the game is started. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means after the game is allowed to start, an abnormality of the visual restriction means can be found and a response to the abnormality can be made.

[Appendix D12]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual recognition state of the target performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note D1 to Supplementary Note D11, further comprising notification means (341, 26) for notifying that the device is in operation.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D12, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the target. Thereby, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means, and can cope with the abnormality.

[Appendix D13]
When the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual status of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual status of the target performance information, the game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D12, further comprising selection means (341, 20) capable of selecting whether to allow

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D13, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be executed when the performance information is not visually recognized. Thereby, when there is no abnormality other than the visual restriction means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to leave the determination as to whether or not to allow the player to use the gaming machine to the gaming hall side.

[Appendix D14]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D13, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D14, the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine. In addition, when a part or all of the information related to the advantage determination probability is displayed on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability Based on the above, an opportunity to determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine is given.

[Appendix D15]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of game balls;
The game according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) Machine.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D15 includes performance information indicating the performance of a ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports. Therefore, the player can display part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make individual differences or change over time when the gaming machine is manufactured. It is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the ball reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning mouth, and if the ball performance based on the winning mouth can be grasped, the game can be continued on the gaming machine based on the performance information. An opportunity to decide whether to do so is given.

[Appendix D16]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
Entering the game ball into the first winning opening (314) until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or until the number of game balls fired on the game board (31) reaches the specific ball number Unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the unit determination number of times that the transfer determination is performed by the shift determination means (41) triggered by a sphere,
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information related to the unit determination number calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D16, the performance information includes performance information related to the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations by displaying part or all of the information about the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the ease of transfer determination. Become. Thereby, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game in the gaming machine based on the unit determination number when the unit determination number can be grasped and enjoyed by guessing the unit determination number. Is granted.

[Appendix D17]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The number of game balls paid out to the first winning port (314) and the number of game balls discharged to the first winning port (313) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) with respect to the number of game balls launched to the game board (31) And further comprising a payout rate calculating means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball,
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information related to the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D17, the performance information includes information regarding the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate by displaying part or all of the performance information related to the payout rate, so that the player can win the first winning entry and the general winning entry. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the appearance rate when he / she can estimate the appearance rate and enjoy it. Is granted.

[Appendix D18]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), And further comprising a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of payout balls.
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D18, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, and the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (the ratio of staying in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable prize opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

[Appendix D19]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls into the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), with respect to the entrance of game balls into the variable winning port (316) An accessory ratio calculating means (41) for calculating an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls between the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the game balls entering the second winning opening (315); ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D19, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). For this reason, the player can estimate or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay rate in special gaming state), stay rate in support gaming state (short-time gaming state) that receives support from motorized equipment, and ease of winning a prize in the variable winning slot and second winning slot (outing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the cypress rate. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

[Appendix E1]
A game board (31) in which a game area where game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) provided in the gaming area and for which a winning ball is paid out by entering a gaming ball;
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area with respect to at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board; ,
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
A performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
A performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
A visibility limiting means (39) that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and that can accommodate a game ball that has entered the special outlet (363);
The visual restriction means (39) is controlled on condition that a game ball enters the visual restriction means (39), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is obtained. Visual state control means (51) for enabling visual recognition;
An abnormality determining means (51) for determining whether or not the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is the visual recognition state of the target performance information;
A first state in which a game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) is allowed to enter the visual restriction means (39), and the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) A switching means (319B) capable of switching between a second state for restricting entry to the visual restriction means (39),
The switching control means for controlling the switching means (319B) to the second state when the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended visual recognition state. 51) and
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the visual restriction means (39) is capable of discharging a game ball accommodated when the visual restriction control means (51) is moved to the second position.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E1 and Supplementary Note E2, when it is determined that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the target visual recognition state, the switching means is set to the second state so that the game to the visual restriction means Sphere entry is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the game ball entering the visual restriction means. For example, when a game ball of the visual restriction means is discharged when the visual restriction means is moved to the second position, if the visual restriction means cannot move to the second position where the game ball can be discharged, A game ball is prevented from entering the restricting means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls having a capacity or more from staying in the visual restriction means and to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the visual restriction means. For this reason, even when a drive abnormality has occurred in which the visual restriction means is not moved from the first position, it is possible to execute the game as usual in the gaming machine.

[Appendix E3]
The switching means (319B) includes a third position (standby position) that allows a game ball entering the special discharge port (363) to enter the visual restriction means (39), and the special discharge port. (363) is movable between a fourth position (actuation position) for restricting entry of the game ball entered into the visual restriction means (39),
The switching control means (51) moves the switching means (319B) from the third position when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual restriction means (39) is not in the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, wherein the game machine is moved to the fourth position.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E3, it is possible to restrict entry of the game ball that has entered the special discharge port into the visual restriction means by moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the entry of a game ball into the visual restriction means when an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E4]
The abnormality determining means (51) includes a detecting means (40B) capable of detecting that the visual restriction means (39A) is in the second position,
The abnormality determining means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40B) when the visual recognition state control means (51) controls the visual restriction means (39) to move to the second position. The game according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E3, wherein when it is not detected that (39A) is in the second position, the visual restriction means (39) is determined not to be in the second position. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E4, it can be determined by the detection means that the visual restriction means is not in the second position. Thereby, it can be detected whether there is an abnormality in the visual restriction means by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E5]
The abnormality determination means (51) determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means (39) during the period from when the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note E1 to Supplementary Note E4, wherein:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means between the time when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when the game can be started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from being in a state in which a game can be started in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means, it is possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Appendix E6]
The abnormality determination unit (51) determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction unit (39) after the game is started, according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E5, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E6, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means after the game is started. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means after the game is allowed to start, an abnormality of the visual restriction means can be found and a response to the abnormality can be made.

[Appendix E7]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual recognition state of the target performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note E1 to Supplementary Note E6, further comprising notification means (341, 26) for notifying that the device is in operation.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E7, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the target. Thereby, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means, and can cope with the abnormality.

[Appendix E8]
When the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual status of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual status of the target performance information, the game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E7, further comprising selection means (341, 20) that enables selection of whether or not to enable.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E8, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be executed when the performance information is not visually recognized. Thereby, when there is no abnormality other than the visual restriction means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to leave the determination as to whether or not to allow the player to use the gaming machine to the gaming hall side.

[Appendix E9]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E8, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E9, the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball performance of the gaming machine. In addition, when a part or all of the information related to the advantage determination probability is displayed on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability Based on the above, an opportunity to determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine is given.

[Appendix E10]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of game balls;
The game according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E9, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) Machine.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10 includes performance information indicating the performance of a ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports. Therefore, the player can display part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make individual differences or change over time when the gaming machine is manufactured. It is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the ball reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines. As a result, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning mouth, and if the ball performance based on the winning mouth can be grasped, the game can be continued on the gaming machine based on the performance information. An opportunity to decide whether to do so is given.

[Appendix E11]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
Entering the game ball into the first winning opening (314) until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or until the number of game balls fired on the game board (31) reaches the specific ball number Unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the unit determination number of times that the transfer determination is performed by the shift determination means (41) triggered by a sphere,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E11, the performance information includes performance information related to the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the number of unit determinations by displaying part or all of the information about the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the ease of transfer determination. Become. Thereby, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game in the gaming machine based on the unit determination number when the unit determination number can be grasped and enjoyed by guessing the unit determination number. Is granted.

[Appendix E12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The number of game balls paid out to the first winning port (314) and the number of game balls discharged to the first winning port (313) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) with respect to the number of game balls launched to the game board (31) And further comprising a payout rate calculating means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information related to the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E12, the performance information includes information related to the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate by displaying part or all of the performance information related to the payout rate, so that the player can win the first winning entry and the general winning entry. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the appearance rate when he / she can estimate the appearance rate and enjoy it. Is granted.

[Appendix E13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), And further comprising a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of payout balls.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10, wherein the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E13, the performance information includes information related to the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, and the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (the ratio of staying in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable prize opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

[Appendix E14]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls into the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316), with respect to the entrance of game balls into the variable winning port (316) An accessory ratio calculating means (41) for calculating an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls between the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the game balls entering the second winning opening (315); ,
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E14, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). For this reason, the player can estimate or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay rate in special gaming state), stay rate in support gaming state (short-time gaming state) that receives support from motorized equipment, and ease of winning a prize in the variable winning slot and second winning slot (outing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the cypress rate. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

10: Game machine 313: General winning port 314: First winning port 315: Second winning port 316: Variable winning port 341: Symbol display unit 35a: Special out ball sensor 36: Clune device 363: Special out ball port 364: Special Out ball passage 365: inhibition wall 367: normal entrance 368: normal passage 37a: special main display portion 38: sub-image display portion 39: retention box 39A: translucent monitor 319: discharge port 319B: forced discharge member 4: Main controller 40A: upper limit position detection sensor 40B: lower limit position detection sensor 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
412d: Game information storage area 4A: Performance information display device 43: Performance display monitor 44: Performance display switch 45: Game set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (4)

Storage means for storing performance information serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball;
Performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
Performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means;
A first position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is not visible or difficult to view from a specific direction on the front, and the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the specific direction on the front. A visual restriction means that is movable between a second position visible from
With
The gaming machine characterized in that the visual restriction means makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction on the front when a specific condition is satisfied. . A transition determination means for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means from among a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities.
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means. The viewing limitation means, the specific condition is moved from said first position when filled a plurality of times in the second position, from said first position each time the previous SL certain conditions are met in the second position the gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2, characterized in Rukoto moved stepwise in the direction toward. 4. The visual condition control means for moving the visual restriction means in a predetermined direction from the first position toward the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Images